Manual en US

LOGO!
___________________
Preface
___________________
Getting started with LOGO! 1
___________________
LOGO! installation and
wiring 2
___________________
Programming LOGO! 3
___________________
LOGO! functions 4
LOGO! ___________________
Web server 5
___________________
UDF (User-Defined
Function) 6
Manual
___________________
Data log 7
___________________
Configuring LOGO! 8
___________________
Using memory cards 9
___________________
Security 10
___________________
LOGO! software 11
___________________
Applications 12
___________________
Technical data A
___________________
Determining the cycle time B
___________________
LOGO! without display
("LOGO! Pure") C
___________________
LOGO! menu structure D
___________________
Order numbers E
___________________
Abbreviations F
This manual applies to LOGO! 0BA8 device series
only.
03/2015
A5E33039675 - AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E33039675 - AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 03/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
With LOGO! you have acquired a logic module that meets the stringent quality requirements
of ISO 9001.
You can use LOGO! in many fields of applications. Due to its high functionality and easy
operation, LOGO! offers you the utmost efficiency for almost any application.
Purpose of this manual

This LOGO! manual provides you with information about the creation of circuit programs,
about the installation and use of LOGO! 0BA8 Base Modules with more enhanced features,
the LOGO! TDE (Text Display with Ethernet interfaces), and LOGO! expansion modules.
0BAx are the last four characters of the order number of the Base Modules and differentiate
the device series.
LOGO!'s place in information technology

The wiring information in your LOGO! manual is also found in the LOGO! Product Info
included with all devices. For further information on programming the LOGO! on your PC,
refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
LOGO!Soft Comfort is LOGO! programming software for PCs. It runs under Windows®
(including Windows XP®, Windows 7®, and Windows 8®), Linux®, and Mac OS X®. It helps
you to get started with LOGO! and to write, test, print out and archive your programs,
independent of LOGO!.
Guide
The manual contains the following chapters:
● Getting started with LOGO!
● LOGO! installation and wiring
● Programming LOGO!
● LOGO! functions
● Web server
● UDF (User-Defined Function)
● Data Log
● Configuring LOGO!
● Using memory cards
● Security
● LOGO! software
● Applications
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 3
Preface
The manual also includes appendices A - F, which follow the chapters.
Valid range of this manual

The manual applies to devices of series 0BA8.
New features of the LOGO! 0BA8 device series

The following features are new for the LOGO! 0BA8 devices:
● Ethernet communication support by all LOGO! 0BA8 Base Modules
Each LOGO! 0BA8 Base Module is equipped with an RJ45 interface and a two-color
status LED for Ethernet communication.
● Small LOGO! 0BA8 module size
Each LOGO! 0BA8 Base Module is designed with a width of 71.5 mm. The small size of
the LOGO! 0BA8 allows you to make efficient use of space.
● New text display module LOGO! TDE with enhanced features
– The LOGO! TDE module is available with two Ethernet interfaces. These two Ethernet
interfaces can also function as a two-port switcher. You can connect the LOGO! TDE
with a Base Module, a PC, or another LOGO! TDE through the Ethernet interfaces.
LOGO! TDE can connect with different Base Modules through IP address selection.
– LOGO! TDE provides a three-pin (P1, P2, and FE) terminal for power connection.
– LOGO! TDE has three main menu commands available, respectively for the IP
address selection of a Base Module, the remote settings of the connected Base
Module, and the independent configuration of the LOGO! TDE.
● Support of 6-line display and three backlight colors
Both the LOGO! onboard display and LOGO! TDE support a 6-line character display and
three backlight colors (white/amber/red). The LOGO! onboard display can display a
maximum of 16 Western European characters or 8 Asian characters per line. LOGO! TDE
can display a maximum of 20 Western European characters or 10 Asian characters per
line.
● Increased maximum I/O connections
LOGO! 0BA8 supports a maximum of 24 digital inputs, 20 digital outputs, 8 analog inputs
and 8 analog outputs.
● Built-in Web server in LOGO! Base Modules
LOGO! 0BA8 provides you with easy access through Internet browsers. With the Web
server function, you can access the LOGO! Base Module using a connected device (PC,
tablet or smart phone) by entering the IP address of the LOGO! module in the Web
browser of the connected device.
LOGO!
4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Preface
● Enhanced functions added to special function blocks

– Astronomical clock: Two new parameters "TR Offset" (sunrise offset) and "TS Offset"
(sunset offset) are available for this function block. You can use these two parameters
to set an offset for the sunrise/sunset value. The offset range is -59 to 59 minutes.
– Message texts: The LOGO! 0BA8 devices support a 6-line message text display and
ticking messages, as well as message text display on the Web server. You can enble
the tick setting for each display line by setting the block parameters.
● More flags for the creation of the circuit program
The LOGO! 0BA8 supports 64 digital flags and 64 analog flags. Some new special flags
are described as follows:
– M28: Enables the LOGO! Display amber backlight
– M29: Enables the LOGO! Display red backlight
– M30: Enables the LOGO! TDE amber backlight
– M31: Enables the LOGO! TDE red backlight
● Extended menu commands for diagnostics
With the extended menu commands for diagnostics, the LOGO! 0BA8 provides a facility
for diagnosing software and hardware errors and viewing the error logs. You can use
these menu commands to troubleshoot and debug the LOGO! system.
● Curve representation of analog value changes
LOGO! 0BA8 supports the graphical display of analog value changes in the form of a
trend curve on the onboard display. You can easily monitor each analog I/O in use by
means of the trend curves when LOGO! is in RUN mode.
● Micro SD card support
LOGO! 0BA8 supports micro SD (Secure Digital) cards that support FAT32 file system
format. You can store and copy-protect a circuit program, with or without the data log of
process data, from LOGO! 0BA8 to an SD card, or copy a circuit program from the card to
LOGO! 0BA8.
● Enhanced Data Log function
LOGO! 0BA8 supports a maximum of 20000 lines for each data log file stored on the
micro SD card. LOGO! automatically creates a new data log file with a new name on the
micro SD card when the number of lines in the current file exceeds the maximum number
of lines.
Compatibility with previous devices

LOGO! 0BA8 device series are incompatible with any previous device series.
For more detailed information about the compatibility between different device series , refer
to the topic "Compatibility (Page 31)".
Additional support
Additional support is available on the Siemens LOGO! Web site
(http://www.siemens.com/logo)
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 5
Preface
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Note
To protect LOGO!Soft Comfort from any undesired manipulation when your PC suffers
malicious attacks from the Internet, Siemens strongly recommends you to install a whitelist
tool such as McAfee Application Control 6.1 on the PC.
LOGO!
6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Getting started with LOGO! ................................................................................................................... 13
2 LOGO! installation and wiring ................................................................................................................ 25
2.1 Modular LOGO! setup .............................................................................................................27
2.1.1 Maximum LOGO! network setup ............................................................................................27
2.1.2 Maximum setup with expansion modules ...............................................................................29
2.1.3 Setup with different voltage classes .......................................................................................30
2.1.4 Compatibility ...........................................................................................................................31
2.2 Installing/removing LOGO! .....................................................................................................32
2.2.1 DIN rail mounting ....................................................................................................................33
2.2.2 Wall-mounting .........................................................................................................................35
2.2.3 Mounting the LOGO! TDE ......................................................................................................36
2.2.4 Labeling LOGO! ......................................................................................................................37
2.3 Wiring LOGO! .........................................................................................................................37
2.3.1 Connecting the power supply .................................................................................................38
2.3.2 Connecting the LOGO! TDE power supply .............................................................................40
2.3.3 Connecting LOGO! inputs .......................................................................................................40
2.3.4 Connecting outputs .................................................................................................................47
2.3.5 Connecting the Ethernet interface ..........................................................................................49
2.4 Putting into operation ..............................................................................................................50
2.4.1 Powering on LOGO!................................................................................................................50
2.4.2 Operating states ......................................................................................................................52
3 Programming LOGO! ............................................................................................................................ 55
3.1 Connectors ..............................................................................................................................56
3.2 Blocks and block numbers ......................................................................................................58
3.3 From circuit diagram to LOGO! program ................................................................................61
3.4 The four golden rules for operating LOGO! ............................................................................64
3.5 Configuring menu access protection for LOGO! .....................................................................65
3.6 Overview of LOGO! menus .....................................................................................................68
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program ..................................................................................69
3.7.1 Selecting programming mode .................................................................................................69
3.7.2 The first circuit program ..........................................................................................................71
3.7.3 Circuit program input...............................................................................................................72
3.7.4 Assigning a circuit program name ..........................................................................................76
3.7.5 Password for circuit program protection .................................................................................77
3.7.6 Switching LOGO! to RUN mode .............................................................................................81
3.7.7 Second circuit program ...........................................................................................................85
3.7.8 Deleting a block ......................................................................................................................91
3.7.9 Deleting block groups .............................................................................................................92
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 7
Table of contents
3.7.10 Correcting programming errors .............................................................................................. 93

3.7.11 Selecting analog output values for RUN/STOP transition ..................................................... 93
3.7.12 Defining the type of analog outputs ....................................................................................... 95
3.7.13 Setting the power-on delay of LOGO! .................................................................................... 96
3.7.14 Clearing the circuit program and password ........................................................................... 97
3.7.15 Summertime/wintertime conversion ....................................................................................... 98
3.7.16 Synchronization.................................................................................................................... 101
3.8 Configuring additional functions for LOGO! ......................................................................... 103
3.8.1 Configuring network settings................................................................................................ 104
3.8.2 Configuring a UDF (User-Defined Function) ........................................................................ 106
3.8.3 Configuring the Data Log ..................................................................................................... 106
3.8.4 Viewing network inputs/outputs ........................................................................................... 106
3.8.5 Changing LOGO! to master/slave mode .............................................................................. 108
3.8.6 Diagnosing errors from LOGO! ............................................................................................ 110
3.9 Memory space and circuit program size .............................................................................. 115
4 LOGO! functions ..................................................................................................................................119
4.1 Constants and connectors ................................................................................................... 119
4.2 Basic functions list - GF ....................................................................................................... 124
4.2.1 AND ...................................................................................................................................... 125
4.2.2 AND with edge evaluation .................................................................................................... 126
4.2.3 NAND (not AND) .................................................................................................................. 127
4.2.4 NAND with edge evaluation ................................................................................................. 127
4.2.5 OR ........................................................................................................................................ 128
4.2.6 NOR (not OR) ...................................................................................................................... 129
4.2.7 XOR (exclusive OR) ............................................................................................................. 130
4.2.8 NOT (Negation, Inverter) ..................................................................................................... 130
4.3 Special functions .................................................................................................................. 131
4.3.1 Designation of the inputs ..................................................................................................... 131
4.3.2 Time response ..................................................................................................................... 132
4.3.3 Backup of the real-time clock ............................................................................................... 133
4.3.4 Retentivity ............................................................................................................................ 133
4.3.5 Parameter protection ........................................................................................................... 133
4.3.6 Calculating the gain and offset of analog values ................................................................. 134
4.4 Special functions list - SF ..................................................................................................... 136
4.4.1 On-delay ............................................................................................................................... 141
4.4.2 Off-delay ............................................................................................................................... 145
4.4.3 On-/off-delay ........................................................................................................................ 147
4.4.4 Retentive on-delay ............................................................................................................... 149
4.4.5 Wiping relay (pulse output) .................................................................................................. 151
4.4.6 Edge-triggered wiping relay ................................................................................................. 153
4.4.7 Asynchronous pulse generator ............................................................................................ 155
4.4.8 Random generator ............................................................................................................... 157
4.4.9 Stairway lighting switch ........................................................................................................ 159
4.4.10 Multiple function switch ........................................................................................................ 161
4.4.11 Weekly timer ........................................................................................................................ 164
4.4.12 Yearly timer .......................................................................................................................... 167
4.4.13 Astronomical clock ............................................................................................................... 173
4.4.14 Stopwatch ............................................................................................................................ 176
4.4.15 Up/down counter .................................................................................................................. 178
LOGO!
8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Table of contents
4.4.16 Hours counter .......................................................................................................................181

4.4.17 Threshold trigger ...................................................................................................................185
4.4.18 Analog threshold trigger ........................................................................................................188
4.4.19 Analog differential trigger ......................................................................................................191
4.4.20 Analog comparator ................................................................................................................193
4.4.21 Analog watchdog ..................................................................................................................197
4.4.22 Analog amplifier ....................................................................................................................200
4.4.23 Latching relay ........................................................................................................................202
4.4.24 Pulse relay ............................................................................................................................203
4.4.25 Message texts .......................................................................................................................204
4.4.26 Softkey ..................................................................................................................................214
4.4.27 Shift register ..........................................................................................................................216
4.4.28 Analog multiplexer ................................................................................................................218
4.4.29 Analog ramp ..........................................................................................................................221
4.4.30 PI controller ...........................................................................................................................225
4.4.31 Pulse width modulator (PWM) ..............................................................................................229
4.4.32 Mathematic instruction ..........................................................................................................232
4.4.33 Mathematic instruction error detection..................................................................................235
4.4.34 Analog filter ...........................................................................................................................237
4.4.35 Max/Min ................................................................................................................................239
4.4.36 Average value .......................................................................................................................243
5 Web server ......................................................................................................................................... 245
5.1 Enabling the Web server ......................................................................................................245
5.2 Logging on to the Web server ...............................................................................................246
5.3 Viewing LOGO! system information ......................................................................................249
5.4 Operating the virtual module on the Web server ..................................................................249
5.5 Viewing and editing variable memory tables ........................................................................255
5.6 Logging off from the Web server ..........................................................................................255
6 UDF (User-Defined Function) .............................................................................................................. 257
7 Data log .............................................................................................................................................. 261
8 Configuring LOGO! ............................................................................................................................. 263
8.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode ................................................................................263
8.1.1 Parameters ...........................................................................................................................265
8.1.2 Selecting the parameters ......................................................................................................266
8.1.3 Modifying parameters ...........................................................................................................267
8.2 Setting the default values for LOGO! ....................................................................................269
8.2.1 Setting the time of day and date ...........................................................................................270
8.2.2 Setting the display contrast and backlight choice .................................................................271
8.2.3 Setting the menu language ...................................................................................................274
8.2.4 Setting the number of AIs in LOGO! .....................................................................................275
8.2.5 Setting the start screen .........................................................................................................275
9 Using memory cards ........................................................................................................................... 277
9.1 Formatting micro SD cards ...................................................................................................277
9.2 Inserting and removing the card from LOGO! ......................................................................281
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 9
Table of contents
9.3 Copying data from LOGO! to the card ................................................................................. 283

9.4 Copying data from the card to LOGO! ................................................................................. 284
10 Security ...............................................................................................................................................287
10.1 Network access security ...................................................................................................... 287
10.2 Program access security ...................................................................................................... 289
10.2.1 Program password protection .............................................................................................. 289
10.2.2 Program copy protection ...................................................................................................... 289
10.3 Menu access security .......................................................................................................... 290
11 LOGO! software ...................................................................................................................................291
11.1 LOGO! software ................................................................................................................... 291
11.2 Connecting LOGO! to a PC ................................................................................................. 293
12 Applications .........................................................................................................................................295
A Technical data .....................................................................................................................................299
A.1 General technical data ......................................................................................................... 299
A.2 Technical data: LOGO! 230... .............................................................................................. 301
A.3 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 230R and LOGO! DM16 230R .............................................. 303
A.4 Technical data: LOGO! 24... ................................................................................................ 306
A.5 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24 and LOGO! DM16 24 ....................................................... 308
A.6 Technical data: LOGO! 24RC... ........................................................................................... 309
A.7 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24R and LOGO! DM16 24R .................................................. 311
A.8 Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... LOGO! DM8 12/24R ......................................................... 313
A.9 Switching capacity/service life of the relay outputs .............................................................. 316
A.10 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 ................................................................................................ 317
A.11 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 RTD ....................................................................................... 317
A.12 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 AQ.......................................................................................... 318
A.13 Technical data: LOGO! Power 12 V..................................................................................... 319
A.14 Technical data: LOGO! Power 24 V..................................................................................... 320
A.15 Technical data: LOGO! Contact 24/230 ............................................................................... 322
A.16 Technical data: LOGO! TDE (Text Display with Ethernet interfaces) .................................. 322
A.17 Technical data: LOGO! CSM12/24 ...................................................................................... 323
A.18 Technical data: LOGO! CSM230 ......................................................................................... 325
B Determining the cycle time ...................................................................................................................327
C LOGO! without display ("LOGO! Pure") ................................................................................................329
D LOGO! menu structure .........................................................................................................................331
D.1 LOGO! Basic ........................................................................................................................ 331
D.1.1 Menu overview ..................................................................................................................... 331
LOGO!
10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Table of contents
D.1.2 Main menu ............................................................................................................................331

D.1.3 Programming menu ..............................................................................................................332
D.1.4 Card menu ............................................................................................................................332
D.1.5 Setup menu ...........................................................................................................................333
D.1.6 Network menu .......................................................................................................................334
D.1.7 Diagnostics menu .................................................................................................................335
D.1.8 Start menu ............................................................................................................................336
D.2 LOGO! TDE ..........................................................................................................................337
D.2.1 Menu overview ......................................................................................................................337
D.2.2 Main menu ............................................................................................................................338
D.2.3 LOGO! selection menu .........................................................................................................339
D.2.4 LOGO! settings menu ...........................................................................................................339
D.2.5 LOGO! TDE settings menu ...................................................................................................341
E Order numbers .................................................................................................................................... 345
F Abbreviations ...................................................................................................................................... 347
Index................................................................................................................................................... 349
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 11
Table of contents
LOGO!
12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Getting started with LOGO! 1
Here's LOGO!
LOGO! is a universal logic module made by Siemens that integrates:
● Controls
● Operator and display panel with background lighting
● Power supply
● Interface for expansion modules
● Interface for a micro SD card
● Interface for an optional text display (TDE) module
● Pre-configured standard functions, for example, on- and off-delays, pulse relay and
softkey
● Timers
● Digital and analog flags
● Inputs and outputs, according to the device type
LOGO! 0BA8 additionally integrates the following components:
● Interfaces for Ethernet communication
● FE (Functional Earth) terminal for connecting to earth ground
● One LED for indicating Ethernet communication status
What LOGO! can do for you

LOGO! offers solutions for domestic and installation engineering applications such as
stairway lighting, external lighting, sun blinds, shutters, shop window lighting and more. It
can also offer solutions for switch cabinet engineering, as well as for mechanical and
apparatus engineering such as gate control systems, air-conditioning systems, and rainwater
pumps.
You can also use LOGO! to implement special control systems in conservatories or
greenhouses, for control signal processing and, by connecting a communications module
such as an AS-i module, for distributed local controlling of machines and processes.
Special versions without operator panel and display unit are available for series production
applications in small machine, apparatus, switching cabinet and installation engineering.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 13
Getting started with LOGO!
Which devices are available?

LOGO! Base Modules are available in two voltage classes:
● Class 1 ≤ 24 V, i.e. 12 VDC, 24 VDC, 24 VAC
● Class 2 > 24 V, i.e. 115 VAC/VDC to 240 VAC/VDC
LOGO! Base Modules are available in two versions:
● LOGO! Basic (version with display): 8 inputs and 4 outputs
● LOGO! Pure (version without display): 8 inputs and 4 outputs
Each module has an expansion interface and an Ethernet interface and provides 44 pre-
configured standard and special function blocks for the creation of your circuit program.
Which expansion modules are available?

● LOGO! DM8 digital modules are available for operation with 12 VDC, 24 VAC/VDC and
115 VAC/VDC to 240 VAC/VDC, and are equipped with four inputs and four outputs.
● LOGO! DM16 digital modules are available for operation with 24 VDC and 115 VAC/VDC
to 240 VAC/VDC, and are equipped with eight inputs and eight outputs.
● LOGO! analog modules are available for operation with 24 VDC and some with 12 VDC,
depending on the specific module. Each is equipped with two analog inputs, two PT100
inputs, two PT100/PT1000 inputs (either PT100 or PT1000 or one of each), or two analog
outputs.
Each digital/analog module has two expansion interfaces for connecting additional modules.
Which display modules are available?

● LOGO! Basic
● LOGO! TDE
Features of the LOGO! TDE

The LOGO! TDE is available for the 0BA8 series. It provides an additional display that is
wider than the LOGO! Basic. It has four function keys that you can program in your circuit
program as inputs. Like the LOGO! Basic, it has four cursor keys, an ESC key and an Enter
key that you can also program in your circuit program and use for navigation on the
LOGO! TDE.
You can create and download a power-up screen for the LOGO! TDE from LOGO!Soft
Comfort. This screen displays briefly when you initially power on the LOGO! TDE. You can
also upload the power-up screen from the LOGO! TDE to LOGO!Soft Comfort.
The LOGO! TDE provides three main menu commands, respectively for the IP address
selection of a Base Module, the remote settings of the connected Base Module, and the
independent configuration of the LOGO! TDE. The menus for the LOGO! TDE are shown in
Appendix "LOGO! TDE (Page 337)".
LOGO!
14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
It's your choice

The various LOGO! Base Modules, expansion modules, LOGO! TDE and communications
modules offer you a highly flexible and adaptive system to suit your specific tasks.
The LOGO! system offers you many solutions for small domestic installations, simple
automation tasks, and even complex engineering tasks involving its integration into a bus
system.
Note
You can only use expansion modules of the same voltage as the LOGO! Base Module.
Mechanical encoding pins in the housing prevent you from connecting devices of a different
voltage class.
Exception: The interface on the left side of an analog module or communications module is
galvanically isolated. These types of expansion modules can therefore be connected to
devices of a different voltage class (Page 30).
A LOGO! TDE has two Ethernet interfaces. You can connect each interface to a Base
Module, a PC, or another LOGO! TDE.
Each LOGO! Base Module supports the following connections for the creation of the circuit
program, regardless of the number of connected modules:
• Digital inputs I1 to I24
• Analog inputs AI1 to AI8
• Digital outputs Q1 to Q20
• Analog outputs AQ1 to AQ8
• Digital flag blocks M1 to M64:
– M8: Startup flag
– M25: Backlight flag: LOGO! onboard display white
– M26: Backlight flag: LOGO! TDE white
– M27: Message text character set flag
– M28: Backlight flag: LOGO! onboard display amber
– M29: Backlight flag: LOGO! onboard display red
– M30: Backlight flag: LOGO! TDE amber
– M31: Backlight flag: LOGO! TDE red
• Analog flag blocks: AM1 to AM64
• Shift register bits: S1.1 to S4.8 (32 shift register bits)
• 4 cursor keys
• Blank outputs: X1 to X64
LOGO! 0BA8 additionally supports the display of the following network digital/analog inputs
and outputs if you have previously configured them in the circuit program in LOGO!Soft
Comfort V8.0 and downloaded the program to the 0BA8 device:
• 64 network digital inputs: NI1 to NI64
• 32 network analog inputs: NAI1 to NAI32
• 64 network digital outputs: NQ1 to NQ64
• 16 network analog outputs: NAQ1 to NAQ16
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 15
The LOGO! structure
① Power supply ② Inputs

③ Outputs ④ FE terminal, for connecting to earth ground
⑤ RJ45 interface, for connection to Ethernet (10/100 ⑥ Ethernet communication status LED
Mbit/s)
⑦ Micro SD card slot ⑧ LCD
⑨ Control panel ⑩ Expansion interface
⑪ Mechanical coding sockets ⑫ Standard DIN rail
LOGO!
16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB

③ Outputs ④ RUN/STOP LED
⑤ Expansion interface ⑥ Mechanical coding pins
⑦ Mechanical coding sockets ⑧ Slide
⑨ Standard DIN rail
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 17

③ Outputs ④ RUN/STOP LED
⑤ Expansion interface ⑥ Mechanical coding pins
⑦ Mechanical coding sockets ⑧ Slide
LOGO!
18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! AM2

③ RUN/STOP LED ④ Expansion interface
⑤ Mechanical coding pins ⑥ Mechanical coding sockets
⑦ Slide ⑧ FE terminal, for connecting to earth ground and the
shielding of analog measuring cables
LOGO! AM2 AQ (0 ... 10 VDC or 0/4 ... 20 mA)
① Power supply ② Outputs

③ RUN/STOP LED ④ Expansion interface
⑤ Mechanical coding pins ⑥ Mechanical coding sockets
⑦ Slide ⑧ FE terminal, for connecting to earth ground
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 19
LOGO! TDE
① Power supply
② Ethernet interfaces
The LOGO! TDE includes a wider display area than the LOGO! onboard display. It includes
four programmable cursor keys, four programmable function keys, an ESC key, and an
ENTER key. You use the Ethernet cable to connect from the Ethernet interface on the right
side of the LOGO! TDE to the Ethernet interface on the LOGO! Base Module.
How to identify LOGO!

The LOGO! identifier informs you of various properties:
● 12/24: 12/24 VDC version
● 230: 115 VAC/VDC to 240 VAC/VDC version
● R: Relay outputs (without R: solid-state outputs)
● C: Integrated real-time clock
● E: Ethernet interface
● o: Version without display ("LOGO! Pure")
● DM: Digital module
● AM: Analog module
● TDE: Text Display with Ethernet interfaces
Symbols
Version with display unit is equipped with 8 inputs, 4 outputs and 1 Ethernet interface.
Version without display unit is equipped with 8 inputs, 4 outputs and 1 Ethernet interface.
LOGO!
20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
The digital module is equipped with 4 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs.
The digital module is equipped with 8 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs.
The analog module is equipped with 2 analog inputs or 2 analog outputs, according to
the device type.
The LOGO! TDE module is equipped with 2 Ethernet interfaces.
Versions
The following LOGO! versions are available:
Symbol Designation Supply voltage Inputs Outputs Properties

LOGO! 12/24RCE 12/24VDC 8 digital 1) 4 relays
(10 A)
LOGO! 230RCE 115 VAC/VDC to 8 digital 4 relays
240 VAC/VDC (10 A)
LOGO! 24CE 24 VDC 8 digital 1) 4 solid state
24 V/0.3 A
LOGO! 24RCE 3) 24 VAC/VDC 8 digital 4 relays
(10 A)
LOGO! 12/24RCEo 12/24 VDC 8 digital 1) 4 relays no display unit
(10 A) no keyboard
LOGO! 24CEo 24 VDC 8 digital 1) 4 solid state no display unit
24 V/0.3 A no keyboard
LOGO! 24RCEo 3) 24 VAC/VDC 8 digital 4 relays no display unit
(10 A) no keyboard
LOGO! 230RCEo 2) 115 VAC/VDC to 8 digital 4 relays no display unit
240 VAC/VDC (10 A) no keyboard
1) Of those can be used alternatively: 4 analog inputs (0 V to 10 V) and 4 fast digital inputs.
2) 230 VAC versions: Two groups consisting of 4 inputs each. Each input within a group must be
connected to the same phase. It is possible to interconnect groups with a different phase.
3) The digital inputs can be operated with P or N action.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 21
Expansion modules
The following expansion modules can be connected to LOGO!:
Symbol Name Power supply Inputs Outputs

LOGO! DM8 12/24R 12/24 VDC 4 digital 4 relays (5 A)
LOGO! DM8 24 24 VDC 4 digital 4 solid state
24 V/0.3 A
LOGO! DM8 24R 3) 24 VAC/VDC 4 digital 4 relays (5 A)
LOGO! DM8 230R 115 VAC/VDC to 4 digital 1) 4 relays (5 A)
240 VAC/VDC
LOGO! DM16 24 24 VDC 8 digital 8 solid state
24 V/0.3 A
LOGO! DM16 24R 24 VDC 8 digital 8 relays (5 A)
LOGO! DM16 230R 115 VAC/VDC to 8 digital 4) 8 relays (5 A)
240 VAC/DC
LOGO! AM2 12/24 VDC 2 analog None
0 V to 10 V or
0/4 mA to 20 mA 2)
LOGO! AM2 RTD 12/24 VDC 2 PT100 or 2 PT1000 None
or 1 PT100 plus 1
PT1000 6)
-50 °C to 200 °C
LOGO! AM2 AQ 24 VDC None 2 analog
0 VDC to 10 VDC
or
0/4 mA to 20 mA
5)
1) Different phases are not allowed within the inputs.

2) 0 V to 10 V, 0/4 mA to 20 mA can be connected optionally.
3) Digital inputs can be operated either with P or with N action.
4) Two groups consisting of four inputs each. Each input within a group must be connected to the
same phase. It is possible to interconnect groups with a different phase.
5) 0 V to 10 V, 0/4 mA to 20 mA can be connected optionally.
6) Sensors supported by the LOGO! AM2 RTD module are the PT100 and PT1000 sensors with a
default temperature coefficient α of 0.003850.
Text display module

The following LOGO! TDE module is available:
Symbol Name Supply voltage Display

LOGO! TDE 24 VAC/VDC LCD (160 x 96)
12 VDC 6-row display
LOGO!
22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Certification and approvals

LOGO! is certified to cULus and cFMus.
● cULus Haz. Loc.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) to
- UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
- CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
- UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
- CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
● FM Approval (US Approval and Canada Approval)
Factory Mutual Research (FM) to
- Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
- CSA C22.2 No. 213
- CSA C22.2 No. 1010-1
APPROVED for use in
- Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx
- Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Note
You will find current approvals on the rating plate of the relevant module.
LOGO! is issued with the CE Certificate of Conformity. It is compliant with IEC 60730-1 and
IEC 61131-2 and interference-proof to EN 55011, Limit Class B.
Marine certification has been requested.
● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
● BV (Bureau Veritas)
● DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
● GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
LOGO! modules are therefore suitable for use in industrial and residential areas. Use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C and D locations or in non-hazardous locations is supported.
ID for Australia
Our products carrying the label shown at the side are compliant with AS/NZS
2064:1997 (Class A) standard.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 23
ID for Korea
Our products (except the LOGO! CSM modules) carrying the label shown at
the side are compliant with Korean standards.
WARNING
Explosion hazard
Do not disconnect equipment while the circuit is live or unless the area is konwn to be free
of ignitable concentrations.
Substitution of any components can impair suitability for Class I, Division 2. Combinations
of equipment are subject to investigation by the local authority having jurisdiction at the time
of the installation.
Recycling and Disposal

You can fully recycle LOGO! devices due to their low-pollutant equipment. Contact a certified
electronic waste disposal center for environmentally acceptable recycling and disposal of
your old devices.
LOGO!
24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! installation and wiring 2
General guidelines
Note the following guidelines for installing and wiring your LOGO!:
● Always ensure that the wiring of your LOGO! is compliant with current rules and
standards. Also, conform with all national and regional regulations when you install and
operate the devices. For information on standards and regulations that apply to your
specific case, contact your local authorities.
● Always switch off power before you wire or install/remove a module.
● Always use cables with appropriate conductor cross-sections for the relevant current. You
can wire LOGO! with cable conductor cross-sections (Page 37) from 1.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2.
● Do not exceed the screw torque of the terminals. Range of torques: 0.5 Nm to 0.6 Nm.
● Keep the cabling as short as possible. If longer cables are necessary, use shielded
versions. Always route your cables in pairs; that it, one neutral conductor plus one phase
conductor or signal line.
● Always keep separate:
– The AC wiring
– High-voltage DC circuits with high-frequency switching cycles
– Low-voltage signal wiring
● Install wires with appropriate strain relief.
● Provide a suitable lightning surge arrester for cables installed in hazardous areas.
● Do not connect an external power supply in parallel to the output load of a DC output.
This could develop a reverse current at the output if you have not installed a diode or
similar barrier device.
● Be sure to use only certified components to ensure reliable functioning of equipment.
Note
Only skilled personnel who are familiar with and follow general engineering rules, relevant
regulations and standards must install LOGO! devices.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 25
LOGO! installation and wiring
What you must note when installing

LOGO! is designed for fixed and enclosed installation in the housing or the control cabinet.
WARNING
Attempts to install or wire LOGO! or related equipment with power applied could cause
electric shock or faulty operation of the equipment. Failure to disable all power to LOGO!
and related equipment during installation or removal procedures could result in death or
serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Always follow appropriate safety precautions and be sure to disconnect power from LOGO!
before attempting to install or remove LOGO! or related equipment.
Modules of a LOGO! are open facilities. This means that you must install LOGO! only in a
housing or cabinet.
Allow access to the housings or cabinets only with the use of a key or a tool and only by
authorized or approved personnel.
You can operate LOGO! from the front at any time.
Safety of electronic control equipment

Introduction
The notes below apply regardless of the type or manufacturer of the electronic control.
Reliability
Maximum reliability of LOGO! devices and components is achieved by implementing
extensive and cost-effective measures during development and manufacture.
This includes the following:
● Use of high-quality components
● Design of all circuits for worst-case scenarios
● Systematic and computer-aided testing of all components
● Burn-in of all large-scale integrated circuits (for example, processors and memory)
● Prevention of static charge when handling MOS ICs (Metal Oxide Semiconducor
Integrated Circuits)
● Visual checks at different stages of manufacture
● Continuous heat-run test at elevated ambient temperature over a period of several days
● Careful computer-controlled final testing
● Statistical evaluation of all returned systems and components to enable the immediate
initiation of suitable corrective measures
● Monitoring of major control components, using online tests (cyclic interrupt for the CPU,
etc.)
These measures are referred to as basic measures.
LOGO!
26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
2.1 Modular LOGO! setup
Carrying out tests

You must ensure safety in your plant.
Before finally commissioning a system, carry out complete functional testing as well as all
the necessary safety testing.
Also, test for any predictable faults that can occur. This means that you will avoid any danger
to the plant or to people during operation.
Risks
In all cases where the occurrence of failures can result in material damage or injury to
persons, take special measures to enhance the safety of the installation - and the application.
System-specific and special regulations exist for such applications. Follow these regulations
exactly when installing the control system (for example, VDE 0116 for burner control
systems).
For electronic control equipment with a safety function, the measures that you must take to
prevent or rectify faults are based on the risks involved in the installation. Beyond a certain
degree of hazard the basic measures mentioned above are not sufficient and you must take
additional safety measures for the controller.
Important information
Follow the instructions in the operating manual exactly. Incorrect handling can render
measures intended to prevent dangerous faults ineffective, or generate additional sources of
danger.
2.1.1 Maximum LOGO! network setup
Maximum LOGO! 0BA8 network setup

LOGO! 0BA8 supports SIMATIC S7 communication over a 10/100 Mbit/s TCP/IP Ethernet
network.
A LOGO! 0BA8 device can support the following network connections:
● A maximum of 16 TCP/IP-based S7 communication connections with the following
devices:
– Additional LOGO! 0BA8 devices
– SIMATIC S7 PLCs with Ethernet functionality
– A maximum of one SIMATIC HMI that supports Ethernet communication with
networked S7 PLCs
There are two types of connections available for S7 communication, static connection
and dynamic connection. For the static connection, the server reserves the required
resources for the connected client to ensure stable data transfer. For the dynamic
connection, the server responds to a communication request only when free resources
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 27
are available. You can configure the static/dynamic connections as required, for example,
n static connections and 16-n dynamic connections. LOGO! supports a maximum of eight
static connections.
● A maximum of one TCP/IP Ethernet connection with the LOGO! TDE. A LOGO! TDE
module can connect with different Base Modules through IP address selection, but can
not communicate with more than one Base Module at the same time.
● A maximum of one TCP/IP Ethernet connection between a LOGO! Base Module and a
PC with LOGO!Soft Comfort V8.0 installed.
Note
You can only construct a LOGO! 0BA8 network topology using LOGO!Soft Comfort V8.0.
A typical LOGO! 0BA8 network setup is shown below:
① Physical Ethernet connections

② Logical connection for communication between LOGO! and PC (by TCP/IP-based Ethernet)
③ Logical connections for S7 communication between SIMATIC devices (with S7 protocol over TCP/IP)
LOGO!
28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
2.1.2 Maximum setup with expansion modules

LOGO! supports a maximum of 24 digital inputs, 8 analog inputs, 20 digital outputs, and 8
analog outputs (Page 13). You can achieve the maximum setup in different ways as shown
below:
Maximum setup of a LOGO! with analog inputs onboard - four in use

LOGO! Base Module, 4 digital modules and 6 analog modules (example)
Maximum setup of a LOGO! with analog inputs onboard - two in use

Maximum setup of a LOGO! without analog inputs onboard (LOGO! 24RCE/24RCEo and LOGO!
230RCE/230RCEo)
For LOGO! 12/24RCE/12/24RCEo and LOGO! 24CE/24CEo modules, you can configure
whether the module uses zero, two or four of the four possible analog inputs. AI inputs are
numbered consecutively depending on how many you configure the LOGO! Base Module to
use. If you configure two inputs, they are numbered AI1 and AI2, and correspond to the I7
and I8 input terminals. Subsequent AI expansions modules would begin numbering at AI3. If
you configure four inputs, they are numbered AI1, AI2, AI3, and AI4, and correspond to I7, I8,
I1, and I2 in that order. Subsequent AI expansions modules would begin numbering at AI5.
See topics "Constants and connectors (Page 119)" and "Setting the number of AIs in LOGO!
(Page 275)".
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 29
High-speed/optimal communication performance

For optimal and high-speed communication performance between the LOGO! Base Module
and the various modules, install the digital modules first, then the analog modules (as the
examples above show). (The special function PI controller is an exception: the AI used for
the value PV should be on the LOGO! Base Module or an analog input module adjacent to
the LOGO! Base Module).
You install the LOGO! TDE module separately and connect it to the LOGO! Base Module
with the Ethernet interface.
2.1.3 Setup with different voltage classes
Rules
You can only connect digital modules to devices of the same voltage class.
You can connect analog and communications modules to devices of any voltage class.
You can replace two similar DM8 expansion modules by one appropriate DM16 expansion
module (and vice versa) without having to change the circuit program.
Note
You can only replace two DM8 12/24R modules with one DM16 24R module if the power
supply is 24 VDC.
You can only replace two DM8 24R modules with one DM16 24R module if they use DC and
positive-voltage input.
Overview: Connecting an expansion module to the LOGO! Base Module

In the following tables, "X" means that the connection is possible; "-" means that the
connection is not possible.
LOGO! Base Module Expansion modules

DM8 12/24R, DM8 24, DM 8 DM8 AM2,
DM16 DM16 24 24R 230R, AM2 RTD, AM2
24R DM16 AQ
230R
LOGO! 12/24RCE x x x - x
LOGO! 230RCE - - - x x
LOGO! 24CE x x x - x
LOGO! 24RCE x x x - x
LOGO! 12/24RCEo x x x - x
LOGO! 24CEo x x x - x
LOGO! 24RCEo x x x - x
LOGO! 230RCEo - - - x x
LOGO!
30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Overview: Connecting an additional expansion module to an expansion module
Expansion module Additional expansion modules

DM8 DM8 24, DM8 24R DM8 AM2,
12/24R, DM16 24 230R, AM2 RTD,
DM16 DM16 AM2 AQ
24R 230R
DM8 12/24R, x x x - x
DM16 24R
DM8 24, x x x - x
DM16 24
DM8 24 R x x x - x
DM8 230R, - - - x x
DM16 230R
AM2, x x x - x
AM2 RTD,
AM2 AQ
2.1.4 Compatibility
You can only use the LOGO! TDE module with equipment series 0BA8. The LOGO! TDE is
fully compatible with LOGO! 0BA8.
The LOGO! TDE module provides two Ethernet ports for network connection and six-line text
display specifically for the LOGO! 0BA8 device.
All expansion modules (with the order number of 6ED1055-1XXXX-0BA2) are completely
compatible with the LOGO! Base Modules of equipment series 0BA8 and you can only use
them with equipment series 0BA8.
LOGO! 0BA8 supports micro SD cards only.
You cannot edit message texts from the LOGO! Base Module that contain any of the
following parameters:
● Par
● Time
● Date
● EnTime
● EnDate
● Analog input
● Digital I/O status
● Special characters (for example: ±, €)
You can only edit such message texts from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 31
2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!
Dimensions
The LOGO! installation dimensions are compliant with DIN 43880.
LOGO! can be snap-mounted to 35 mm DIN rails according to EN 60715 or mounted on the
wall with two M4 screws.
LOGO! width:
● LOGO! TDE has a width of 128.2 mm.
● LOGO! 0BA8 Base Modules have a width of 71.5 mm.
● LOGO! expansion modules have a width of 35.5 mm (DM8...) or 71.5 mm (DM16...).
Note
The figures below show you an example of the installation and removal of a LOGO!
12/24RCE and a digital module. The measures shown apply to all other LOGO! Base
Module versions and expansion modules.
WARNING
Risk to life when you touch live parts
Death or serious injury can result when you touch live parts.
Always switch off power before you remove or insert an expansion module.
LOGO!
32 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
2.2.1 DIN rail mounting
Mounting
To mount a LOGO! Base Module and a digital module onto a DIN rail, follow these steps:
1. Hook the LOGO! Base Module onto the rail.
2. Push down the lower end to snap it on. The mounting interlock at the rear must engage.
3. On the right side of the LOGO! Base Module/LOGO! expansion module, remove the
connector cap.
4. Place the digital module onto the DIN rail on the right-hand side of the LOGO! Base
Module.
5. Slide the digital module towards the left until it contacts the LOGO! Base Module.
6. Using a screwdriver, push the interlock to the left. In its end position the slide interlock
engages in the LOGO! Base Module.
Repeat the digital module steps to mount further expansion modules.
Note
Be sure to cover the expansion interface on the last expansion module.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 33
Removal
To remove LOGO! if you have installed only one LOGO! Base Module, follow these steps:
1. Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the slide interlock and move the latch
downward.
2. Swing the LOGO! Base Module off the DIN rail.
To remove LOGO! if you have connected at least one expansion module to the LOGO! Base
Module, follow these steps:
1. Using a screwdriver, push the integrated slide interlock to the right.
2. Slide the expansion module off towards the right.
3. Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the slide interlock and lever it
downward.
4. Swing the expansion module off the profile rail.
Repeat steps 1 to 4 for all other expansion modules.
Note
When removing modules, be sure to disengage the slide interlock of the module that
connects it to the next module. When removing multiple modules, it is easier to start with the
last module on the right side.
LOGO!
34 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
2.2.2 Wall-mounting
Follow the instructions below to wall-mount LOGO! by means of two mounting slides and two
M4 screws (tightening torque 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm).
Note
When you do not wall-mount LOGO!, always keep the mounting slides in the factory default
positions, that is, within the data area given in the illustration above; otherwise, the mounting
slides may deform if they are exposed to hot and humid surroundings for a long term.
Drilling template for wall-mounting

Before you can wall-mount LOGO!, you need to drill holes using the template shown below:
All dimensions in mm
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 35
Bore hole for M4 screw, tightening torque 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm

①LOGO! Base Module
② LOGO! expansion modules, DM8 ..., AM...
③ LOGO! expansion modules, DM16 ...
2.2.3 Mounting the LOGO! TDE
Note
Make sure you mount the LOGO! TDE vertically on a flat surface of an IP 65 or Type 4X/12
enclosure.
To prepare the mounting surface for the optional LOGO! TDE and mount it, follow these
steps:
1. Cut a 119 mm × 78.5 mm (tolerance: +0.5 mm) hole in the mounting surface.
2. Place the included gasket on the frontplate of the LOGO! TDE.

3. Fit the LOGO! TDE into the cutout you made in the mounting surface.
4. Attach the mounting brackets (included) to the LOGO! TDE.
5. Tighten the mounting screws on the mounting brackets to 0.2 Nm torque to secure the
LOGO! TDE.
LOGO!
36 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
① Mounting brackets
② Mounting screws
③ Gasket
④ Cabinet door or control panel
(Thickness: 1.5 mm to 4 mm)
You can then connect the LOGO! TDE to the LOGO! Base Module through the Ethernet
interface.
2.2.4 Labeling LOGO!

The rectangular areas on the LOGO! modules are intended for labeling.
In the case of expansion modules, you can use the rectangular areas for labeling the inputs
and outputs, for example. In this connection, you can enter a delta factor of +8 for the inputs
or +4 for the outputs if the LOGO! Base Module already has 8 inputs or 4 outputs.
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Wire LOGO! using a screwdriver with a 3 mm blade.
You do not need to wire ferrules for the terminals. You can use conductors fulfilled the
following requirements:
● Cross-sections of up to the following thicknesses:
– 1 × 2.5 mm2
– 2 × 1.5 mm2 for each second terminal chamber
● Conductor material: Cu
● Insulation temperature rating: 75 °C
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 37
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
Tightening torque: 0.5 Nm to 0.6 Nm or 4.5 in-lbf to 5.3 in-lbf.
Note
Always cover the terminals after you have completed the installation. To protect LOGO!
adequately from impermissible contact to live parts, comply with local standards.
2.3.1 Connecting the power supply

The 230 V versions of LOGO! are suitable for operation with rated voltages of 115 VAC/VDC
and 240 VAC/VDC. The LOGO! 24 V and 12 V versions can be operated with a 24 VDC,
24 VAC or 12 VDC power supply. For information on permissible voltage tolerances, line
frequencies and power consumption, refer to the installation instructions in the Product
Information supplied with your device and to the technical data in Appendix A.
The LOGO! TDE must be supplied with a voltage of 12 VDC or 24 VAC/VDC.
CAUTION
Expansion modules DM8 230R and DM16 230R must be operated with the same type of
power supply (DC or AC) as for the connected 230 V version of the LOGO! Base Module.
The same supply output "+/- "on DC power supplies or "N/L" on AC power supplies must
connect to the same phase on both the expansion module DM8/16 230R and the
connected LOGO! 230 .... Failure to follow the instructions could result in personal injury.
Note
A power failure might cause an additional edge triggering signal at the special functions. The
stored data will be from the last uninterrupted cycle.
LOGO!
38 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
Connecting LOGO!
Connect LOGO! to the power supply as shown below, depending on whether your power
supply is DC or AC:
Note
LOGO! is a double-insulated switchgear. You must connect its FE terminal to earth ground.
Circuit protection with AC voltage

To suppress voltage peaks on the power supply lines, you can install a metal oxide varistor
(MOV). Make sure the operating voltage of the varistor (MOV) used lies at least 20% above
the rated voltage (for example S10K275).
Circuit protection with DC voltage

To suppress voltage peaks on the power supply lines, install a protection device, for example
DEHN (order number 918 402).
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 39
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
2.3.2 Connecting the LOGO! TDE power supply

You must connect the LOGO! TDE to an external power supply that supplies a voltage of
12 VDC or 24 VAC/VDC. The LOGO! TDE includes a power connector. Connect the power
supply to the power connector then plug the power connector to the power supply interface
on LOGO! TDE.
① Ethernet interfaces
② Power supply
• The power connection is non-polar. If you connect a DC power supply to the LOGO!
TDE, you can connect the positive supply wire or negative supply wire to either pin 1
or pin 2.
• Pin 3 must be connected to the ground.
Note
Siemens recommends that you protect the LOGO! TDE with a 0.5 A safety fuse on the
power supply.
2.3.3 Connecting LOGO! inputs
Requirements
At the inputs you connect sensor elements such as: momentary pushbuttons, switches, light
barriers, daylight control switches etc.
LOGO!
40 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
Sensor characteristics for LOGO!
LOGO! 12/24RCE LOGO! 24CE LOGO! DM8 LOGO! DM8

LOGO! 12/24RCEo LOGO! 24CEo 12/24R 24
I3 ... I6 I1,I2,I7,I8 I3 ... I6 I1,I2,I7,I8 I1 ... I8 I1 ... I8
Signal status 0 < 5 VDC < 5 VDC < 5 VDC < 5 VDC < 5 VDC < 5 VDC
Input current < 0.85 mA < 0.05 mA < 0.85 mA < 0.05 mA < 0.85 mA < 0.85 mA
Signal status 1 > 8.5 VDC > 8.5 VDC > 12 VDC > 12 VDC > 8.5 VDC > 12 VDC
Input current > 1.5 mA > 0.1 mA > 2 mA > 0.15 mA > 1.5 mA > 2 mA
LOGO! 24RCE (AC) LOGO! 24RCE (DC) LOGO! 230RCE (AC) LOGO! 230RCE (DC)
LOGO! 24RCEo (AC) LOGO! 24RCEo (DC) LOGO! 230RCEo (AC) LOGO! 230RCEo (DC)
LOGO! DM8 24R (AC) LOGO! DM8 24R (DC) LOGO! DM8 230R (AC) LOGO! DM8 230R (DC)
Signal status 0 < 5 VAC < 5 VDC < 40 VAC < 30 VDC
Input current < 1.0 mA < 1.0 mA < 0.03 mA < 0.03 mA
Signal status 1 > 12 VAC > 12 VDC > 79 VAC > 79 VDC
Input current > 2.5 mA > 2.5 mA > 0.08 mA > 0.08 mA
LOGO! DM16 24R LOGO! DM16 24 LOGO! DM16 230R (AC) LOGO! DM16 230R (DC)
Signal status 0 < 5 VDC < 5 VDC < 40 VAC < 30 VDC
Input current < 1.0 mA < 1.0 mA < 0.05 mA < 0.05 mA
Signal status 1 > 12 VDC > 12 VDC > 79 VAC > 79 VDC
Input current > 2.0 mA > 2.0 mA > 0.08 mA > 0.08 mA
Note
LOGO! 230RCE/230RCEo and expansion module DM16 230R each contains two groups of
four inputs, for a total of eight. Within each group, you must operate all inputs on the same
phase. Different phases are only possible between the groups.
Example: I1 to I4 on phase L1, I5 to I8 on phase L2.
You must not connect the inputs of the LOGO! DM8 230R to different phases.
Sensor connections
Connecting glow lamps and two-wire proximity switches (Bero) to LOGO! 230RCE/230RCEo
or LOGO! DM8 230R (AC) and LOGO! DM16 230R (AC)
The figure below shows how you connect a switch with a glow lamp to LOGO!. The current
that flows through the glow lamp allows LOGO! to detect a "1" signal even though the switch
contact is not closed. If, however you use a switch that has the glow lamp fitted with a power
supply, this response does not occur.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 41
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
Take into account the quiescent current of any two-wire proximity switches that you use. The
level of the quiescent current of some two-wire proximity switches is high enough to trigger a
logical "1" signal at the LOGO! input. You should therefore compare the quiescent current of
the proximity switches with the technical data of inputs (Page 299).
Remedy
To suppress this response, use an X1/X2-type capacitor rated at 100 nF and 275 VAC. In a
destructive situation, this type of capacitor safely disconnects. You must choose the voltage
level for which the capacitor is rated such that it is not destroyed in the case of overvoltage!
At 230 VAC, the voltage between N and an input I(n) must not be greater than 40 V to
guarantee a "0" signal. You can connect approximately ten glow lamps to the capacitor.
Restrictions
Signal status transitions 0 → 1/1 → 0
After a 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 transition, the signal must remain constant at the input at least for the
duration of one program cycle, so that LOGO! can detect the new signal status.
The size of the circuit program determines the program execution time. The appendix
"Determining the cycle time (Page 327)" contains a benchmark test routine that you can use
to determine the current scan cycle time.
Special features of LOGO! 12/24RCE/RCEo and LOGO! 24CE/24CEo

Fast digital inputs: I3, I4, I5 and I6
These modules include fast digital inputs (up/down counters, threshold triggers). The
restrictions mentioned earlier do not apply to these fast digital inputs.
Note
Expansion modules do not have fast digital inputs.
Analog inputs: I1 and I2, I7 and I8

You can use the inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8 of LOGO! versions 12/24RCE/RCEo and
24CE/24CEo as either digital inputs or analog inputs. The LOGO! circuit program defines the
input mode (digital or analog).
LOGO!
42 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
The inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8 provide digital inputs, and the inputs AI3, AI4, AI1 and AI2 provide
analog inputs, as described in the topic "Constants and connectors (Page 119)". AI3
corresponds to the input terminal I1; AI4 corresponds to I2; AI1 corresponds to I7; AI2
corresponds to I8. The use of AI3 and AI4 is optional. You configure your LOGO! to use
either two or four analog inputs as the topic "Setting the number of AIs in LOGO!
(Page 275)" describes.
When using inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8 as analog inputs, only the range from 0 to 10 VDC is
available.
Connecting a potentiometer to inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8
To allow you to achieve 10 V as the maximum value when you completely turn the
potentiometer once, you must connect a series resistor on the potentiometer's input side
regardless of the input voltage (see figure below).
We suggest the following sizes of potentiometers and associated series resistors:
Voltage Potentiometer Series Resistor

12 V 5 kΩ -
24 V 5 kΩ 6.6 kΩ
When using a potentiometer and 10 V input voltage as the maximum value, you must ensure
that with a connected input voltage of 24 V, 14 V must release via the series resistor to
ensure a maximum supply of 10 V when you turn the potentiometer one full rotation. With a
voltage of 12 V, you can neglected this.
Note
The LOGO! AM2 expansion module provides additional analog inputs. The LOGO! AM2
RTD expansion module provides PT100/PT1000 inputs.
Always use twisted and shielded cables for analog signals, and keep these as short as
possible.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 43
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
Sensor connections
Connect sensors to LOGO! as shown below.
LOGO! 12/24.... and LOGO! 24...
The inputs of these devices are not isolated

and therefore require a common reference
potential (chassis ground).
With LOGO! 12/24RCE/RCEo and LOGO!
24CE/24CEo modules, you can tap analog
signals between the supply voltage and chas-
sis ground (* = series resistor (6.6 kΩ) at 24
VDC).
Connection example
LOGO!
44 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
LOGO! 230....
The inputs of these devices are in two groups,

each consisting of four inputs. Different phas-
es are only possible between blocks, but not
within the blocks.
Connection example
WARNING
Current safety regulations (VDE 0110, ... and IEC 61131-2, ... as well as cULus) do not
permit the connection of different phases to an AC input group (I1 to I4 or I5 to I8) or to the
inputs of a digital module.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 45
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
LOGO! AM2
① FE terminal for connecting earth and shield- ③ Cable shielding

ing the analog measuring cable
② Earth ④ Standard DIN rail
The illustration above shows an example of four-wire current measurement and two-wire
voltage measurement.
Connecting a two-wire sensor to the LOGO! AM2
Wire up the two-wire sensor's connecting wires as follows:
1. Connect the sensor's output to connection U (0 V to 10 V voltage measurement) or to
connection I (0/4 mA to 20 mA current measurement) of the AM2 module.
2. Connect the plus connector on the sensor to the 24 V supply voltage (L+).
3. Connect the ground connection of the current output M (on the right side of the sensor, as
shown in the figure above) to the corresponding M input (M1 or M2) on the AM2 module.
LOGO! AM2 RTD

You can connect a maximum of two PT100 sensors or two PT1000 or one PT100 plus one
PT1000 sensor in a two-wire or three-wire connection or in a mixed use of two-wire and
three-wire connection to the module. Note that the sensor type supported by the module is
only PT100 or PT1000 with the default temperature coefficient of α= 0.003850.
For a two-wire connection, you need to short-circuit terminals U1- and IC1 or U2- and IC2.
Errors caused by the ohmic resistance of the measuring line are not compensated for this
type of connection. If a PT100 sensor is connected, a line resistance of 1 Ω is proportional to
measuring error of +2.5 °C; if a PT1000 sensor is connected, a line resistance of 1 Ω is
proportional to measuring error of +0.25 °C.
A three-wire technique suppresses the influence of the cable length (ohmic resistance) on
the result of the measurement.
LOGO!
46 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
Note
Fluctuating analog values can occur if you do not mount/correctly mount the screening on
the connecting wire from the analog valuator device to the analog AM2 / AM2 RTD LOGO!
expansion module (encoder wire).
To avoid fluctuating analog values when using these expansion modules, take the following
measures:
• Use only shielded encoder wires.
• Shorten the encoder wire as much a possible. The encoder wire must not be more than
10 meters long.
• Clamp the encoder wire on one side only and clamp it only to the FE terminal on the
AM2/AM2 AQ/AM2 RTD expansion module.
• Connect ground on the encoder supply to the FE terminal on the expansion module.
• Avoid operating the LOGO! AM2 RTD expansion module with a power supply that is not
grounded (potential-free). If you cannot avoid this, connect the negative output/ground
output on the power supply to the shielding on the resistance thermometer's measuring
wires.
2.3.4 Connecting outputs
LOGO! ...R...
The LOGO! ...R... version includes relay outputs. The potential of the relay contacts is
isolated from the power supply and the inputs.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 47
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
Requirements for relay outputs

You can connect various loads to the outputs; e.g., lamps, fluorescent lamps, motors,
contactor relays, etc. For information on the properties required for the loads connected to
LOGO! ...R..., refer to the technical data (Page 299).
Connecting
Connect the load to LOGO! ...R... as shown below:
LOGO! with solid-state outputs

You can identify LOGO! versions with solid-state outputs by the fact that the letter R is
missing from their type name. The outputs are short circuit-proof and overload-proof. An
auxiliary load voltage supply is not necessary, because LOGO! supplies the load voltage.
Requirements for solid-state outputs

The load connected to LOGO! must have the following characteristics:
● The maximum switched current is 0.3 A per output.
Connecting
Connect the load to a LOGO! with solid-state outputs as shown below:
LOGO!
48 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
LOGO! AM2 AQ
The illustration below shows an example of how to connect the voltage or current load.
① Earth
② Standard DIN rail
2.3.5 Connecting the Ethernet interface
LOGO! ...E
The LOGO! ...E version is equipped with a 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet RJ45 interface.
Requirements for the network cable

Use a shielded Ethernet cable to connect to the Ethernet interface. To minimize
electromagnetic interference, make sure you use a standard Category 5 shielded twisted-
pair Ethernet cable with a shielded RJ45 connector on each end.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 49
2.4 Putting into operation
Connecting
You connect the FE terminal to earth ground, and connect a network cable to the Ethernet
interface.
① Earth ground
② Ethernet cable, for connecting to the Ethernet interface
③ Ethernet status LED
Ethernet status LED
LED type Color Description

Status LED Flashing orange LOGO! is receiving/sending data across Ethernet.
Steady green LOGO! is already connected to Ethernet.
2.4.1 Powering on LOGO!

LOGO! does not have a power switch. The reaction of LOGO! during startup depends on the
following:
● Whether a circuit program is stored in LOGO!
● Whether a micro SD card is inserted
● Whether this is a LOGO! version without display unit (LOGO!...o)
● Whether LOGO! is in RUN mode or STOP mode at the time of power failure
To ensure that the expansion module on LOGO! changes to RUN mode, check the following:
● Has the sliding contact between LOGO! and the expansion module snapped into place
properly?
● Is the power supply connected to the expansion module?
● In addition, always ensure that you switch on the power supply to the expansion module
first before activating the power supply to the LOGO! Base Module (or activate both
LOGO!
50 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
power supplies at the same time); if you do not do this, the system does not detect the
expansion module when you start up the LOGO! Base Module.
The following illustration shows all possible reactions of LOGO!:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 51
You can also memorize four simple rules for starting LOGO! :
1. If neither LOGO! nor the inserted card contains a circuit program, the LOGO! Basic
displays the following:
2. LOGO! automatically copies the circuit program on the card to memory and overwrites
the existing circuit program.
3. If there is a circuit program in LOGO! or on the card, LOGO! adopts the operational state
it had prior to power-off. Versions without a display unit (LOGO!...o) automatically change
from STOP to RUN (LED changes from red to green).
4. If you have enabled retentivity for at least one function, or a function is permanently
retentive, LOGO! retains the current values at power-off.
Note
When a power failure occurs while you are entering a circuit program, the program in LOGO!
is missing after power is returned.
Before you modify the circuit program, save a backup copy of your original to a card or to a
computer using LOGO!Soft Comfort.
2.4.2 Operating states
LOGO! Base Module operating states

LOGO! Base Modules (LOGO! Basic or LOGO! Pure) have two operating states: STOP and
RUN.
STOP RUN
• The display shows that the program is • Display: Screen mask for monitoring I/O and
empty when you start the program messages (after START in the main menu) or for
the parameter assignment menu
(except for LOGO!...o devices)
• Switching LOGO! to programming mode (except for LOGO!...o devices)
(except for LOGO!...o devices) • Switching LOGO! to parameter assignment mode
• LED is red (except for LOGO!...o devices)
(only for LOGO!...o devices) • LED is green
(only for LOGO!...o devices)
LOGO!
52 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
STOP RUN
Action of LOGO!: Action of LOGO!:
• The input data is not read. • LOGO! reads the status of the inputs.
• The circuit program is not executed. • LOGO! uses the circuit program to calculate the
• The relay contacts are permanently open status of the outputs.
or the solid-state outputs are switched off. • LOGO! switches the relay/solid-state outputs on
or off.
Note
After switching the power on, the system briefly switches through the outputs on the LOGO!
24CE/24CEo. With an open circuit, a voltage of > 8 V can occur for up to approximately 100
ms; when the circuit is loaded, this time reduces to a matter of microseconds.
LOGO! expansion modules, operating states

LOGO! expansion modules have three operating states. The color of the LED (RUN/STOP)
indicates one of three operating states for LOGO! expansion modules.
Green (RUN) Red (STOP) Orange/Yellow

The expansion module com- The expansion module does not Initialization phase of the ex-
municates with the device to the communicate with the device to pansion module
left. its left.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 53
LOGO!
54 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO! 3
Programming refers to creating a circuit program from the LOGO! Base Module.
In this chapter you will learn how to use LOGO! to create the LOGO! circuit programs for
your application.
LOGO!Soft Comfort is the LOGO! programming software that you can use on your PC to
quickly and easily create, test, modify, save and print the circuit programs. The topics in this
manual, however, relate only to the creation of circuit programs on the actual LOGO! Base
Module. The programming software LOGO!Soft Comfort contains extensive online help.
Note
LOGO! versions without a display unit, that is, the LOGO! 24CEo, LOGO! 12/24RCEo,
LOGO! 24RCEo and LOGO! 230RCEo versions, do not have an operator panel and display
unit. These devices are ideal for use in small machine and process equipment engineering
systems for series production.
You do not program LOGO!...o versions directly on the device. Instead, you download a
program to the device from LOGO!Soft Comfort or from memory cards with the program you
created on another LOGO! device.
LOGO! versions without a display cannot write data to memory cards.
See Chapters "Using memory cards (Page 277)", "LOGO! software (Page 291)" and the
Appendix "LOGO! without display ("LOGO! Pure") (Page 329)" for more information.
A small example in the first part of this chapter introduces the operating principles of LOGO!:
● You will learn the meaning of two basic terms, namely the connector and the block.
● As the next step, you will create a circuit program based on a simple conventional circuit.
● Lastly, you will enter this program directly in LOGO!
It will take you only a few pages of this manual to store your first executable circuit program
in the LOGO! device. With suitable hardware (switches etc.), you will then be able to carry
out initial tests.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 55
Programming LOGO!
3.1 Connectors
3.1 Connectors
LOGO! is equipped with inputs and outputs

Example of a configuration with several modules:
The illustration shows the conceptual usage of the inputs, not the actual physical markings
on the module.
The letters I followed by numerals identify the inputs. When you look at LOGO! from the front,
you can see the input terminals at the top. Only analog input modules LOGO! AM2 and AM2
RTD have the inputs at the bottom.
LOGO!
56 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
3.1 Connectors
The letters Q followed by numerals (on AM2 AQ, AQ plus numeral) identify the outputs. In
the figure, you can see the output terminals at the bottom.
Note
LOGO! can recognize, read and switch the I/O of all expansion modules regardless of their
type. The I/O numbers follow the installation order of the modules.
For LOGO! 0BA8 series, the following I/O and flag blocks are available for creating your
circuit program from LOGO!:
• I1 to I24, AI1 to AI8, Q1 to Q20, AQ1 to AQ8, M1 to M64, and AM1 to AM64
• 32 shift register bits S1.1 to S4.8
• 4 cursor keys C ,C ,C and C
• four function keys on the LOGO! TDE: F1, F2, F3, and F4
• 64 blank outputs X1 to X64
If you have previously configured any of the network digital or analog inputs/outputs NI1 to
NI64, NAI1 to NAI32, NQ1 to NQ64, and NAQ1 to NAQ16 in your circuit program from
LOGO!Soft Comfort, after downloading the circuit program to LOGO!, these network digital
or analog inputs/outputs are available in the LOGO!; however, you can not edit the rest of
the program from the LOGO!, except for the Par parameter.
See the "Constants and connectors (Page 119)" topic for more details.
The following applies to inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8 of LOGO! 12/24... and LOGO! 24CE/24CEo
versions: If you use I1, I2, I7 or I8 in the circuit program, this input signal is digital. If you use
AI3, AI4, AI1, or AI2, the input signal is analog. The numbering of the analog inputs is
significant: AI1 and AI2 corresponded to I7 and I8. With the addition of two new analog
inputs, these modules optionally use I1 for AI3 and I2 for AI4. See the graphical
representation in the topic on "Maximum setup with expansion modules (Page 29)". Also
note that you can also use I3, I4, I5, and I6 as fast digital inputs.
LOGO!'s connectors
The term connector refers to all connections and states in LOGO! .
The digital I/O status can be '0' or '1'. Status '0' means that the input does not carry a specific
voltage. Status '1' means that the input does carry a specific voltage.
The 'hi' and 'lo' connectors make it easier for you to create the circuit program. 'hi' (high) is
assigned the status '1', and 'lo' (low) is assigned the status '0'.
You do not have to use all of the connectors of a block. The circuit program automatically
assigns the unused connectors a status that ensures proper functioning of the relevant block.
For information on the meaning of the term "block", refer to the topic on "Blocks and block
numbers (Page 58)".
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 57
Programming LOGO!
3.2 Blocks and block numbers
LOGO! has the following connectors :
Connectors
Inputs LOGO! 230RCE Two groups: I9 to I24 AI1 to none

LOGO! 230RCEo I1 to I4 and I5 to I8 AI8
LOGO! 24RCE
LOGO! 24RCEo
LOGO! 12/24RCE I1, I2, I3-I6, I7, I8 I9 to I24 AI5 to
LOGO! 12/24RCEo AI3, AI4 ... AI1, AI2 AI8
LOGO! 24CE
LOGO! 24CEo
Outputs Q1 to Q4 Q5 to Q20 none AQ1
to
AQ8
lo Logical '0' signals (off)
hi Logical '1' signals (on)
Flags Digital flags: M1 to M64
Analog flags: AM1 to AM64
Shift register bits S1.1 to S4.8
Network inputs 1) NI1 to NI64
Network analog NAI1 to NAI32
inputs 1)
Network outputs 1) NQ1 to NQ64
Network analog NAQ1 to NAQ16
outputs 1)
DM: Digital module

AM: Analog module
1) To make these four connectors available in a LOGO! 0BA8, you must configure them in the circuit
program with LOGO!Soft Comfort V8.0 and download the circuit program to the LOGO! 0BA8 de-
vice.

This chapter shows you how to use LOGO! elements to create complex circuits and how
blocks and I/O are interconnected.
In the topic "From circuit diagram to LOGO! program (Page 61)" you will learn how to
transform a conventional circuit into a LOGO! circuit program.
LOGO!
58 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
Blocks
A block in LOGO! represents a function that is used to convert input information into output
information. Previously you had to wire the individual elements in a control cabinet or
terminal box. When you create the circuit program, you interconnect the blocks.
Logic operations
The most elementary blocks are the logic operations:
● AND
● OR
● ...
These special functions offer you significantly greater performance:

● Pulse relay
● Up/down counter
● On-delay
● Softkey
● ....
The chapter entitled "LOGO! functions (Page 119)" gives a full list of the LOGO! functions.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 59
Programming LOGO!
Block representation on the LOGO! onboard display

The figure below shows a typical view of the LOGO! onboard display. As you can see, it can
show only one block at a time. LOGO! shows the block number on the top of the display by
default if you assign no name to this block. The block numbers help you check the circuit
structure. Alternatively, you can also choose to display a customized block name instead of
the block number. For more information about assigning a block name, refer to Section
"Circuit program input (Page 72)".
Assigning a block number

LOGO! automatically assigns each new block in a circuit program a block number. LOGO!
uses these block numbers to indicate the block interconnections. This means that these
numbers are mainly an aid to your orientation in the circuit program.
The figure above shows you three views of the LOGO! onboard display, which represent the
circuit program. As you can see, LOGO! interconnects the blocks using their numbers. To
scroll the circuit program, use the keys or .
LOGO!
60 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
3.3 From circuit diagram to LOGO! program
Advantages of block numbers

You can connect almost any block to an input of the current block by means of its block
number. In this way, you can reuse the interim results of logical or other operations, reduce
programming effort, save memory space and clean up your circuit layout. To do so, however,
you need to know how LOGO! has named the blocks.
Note
An organizational program chart can be a valuable aid when you create the circuit program
because you can enter in this chart all the block numbers that LOGO! assigns.
By using the LOGO!Soft Comfort software to program LOGO!, you can directly create a
function chart of your circuit program. LOGO!Soft Comfort also allows you to assign 12-
character names to up to 100 blocks, and to view these on the LOGO! onboard display in
parameter assignment mode. See the topic "The four golden rules for operating LOGO!
(Page 64)".
View of a circuit diagram

The following illustration shows a typical circuit diagram that represents the circuit logic:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 61
Programming LOGO!
Creating this circuit with LOGO!

In LOGO! you create a circuit logic by interconnecting blocks and connectors:
Note
Although you have four inputs available for logic operations (Page 124), most of the views
only show three inputs for reasons of clarity. You program this fourth input and assign
parameters just like you do with the other three inputs.
To create a new circuit logic in LOGO!, start at the circuit output.

The output is the load or relay that is to be switched.
Convert the circuit logic into blocks by working through the circuit, starting at the output and
ending at the input:
Step 1: Connect the make contact S3 in series with another circuit element to output Q1. A
series connection corresponds to the AND block:
Step 2: Use an OR block to connect S1 and S2 in parallel. A parallel circuit corresponds to

the OR block:
LOGO!
62 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
Unused inputs
The circuit program automatically assigns the unused connectors a status that ensures
proper functioning of the relevant block.
In our example we shall use only two inputs of the OR block and two inputs of the AND block;
the third and fourth inputs are unused.
Now connect the I/O to LOGO! .
Wiring
Connect the switches S1 to S3 to the screw terminals of your LOGO! :
● S1 to connector I1 of LOGO!
The output of the AND block controls the relay at output Q1. The load E1 connects to output
Q1.
Wiring example
The following figure shows you the wiring, based on a 230 VAC version of LOGO!.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 63
Programming LOGO!
3.4 The four golden rules for operating LOGO!
3.4 The four golden rules for operating LOGO!
Rule 1: Changing the operating mode

● You create the circuit program in programming mode. After power is on, and when the
program is empty in LOGO!, LOGO! selects the programming mode by default.
● You can edit timer and parameter values of an existing circuit program in both parameter
assignment mode and programming mode. During parameter assignment LOGO! is in
RUN mode; that is, it continues executing the circuit program (see the topic "Configuring
LOGO! (Page 263)"). To work in programming mode, you need to terminate the circuit
program.
● Select the menu command on the main menu to set RUN mode.
● When the system is in RUN mode, you can return to parameter assignment mode by
pressing the ESC key.
● When parameter assignment mode is open and you want to return to programming mode,
select the menu command from the parameter assignment menu to
set STOP mode.
For more details on operating modes, refer to the Appendix topic "LOGO! menu structure
(Page 331)".
Rule 2: Outputs and inputs

● Always create your circuit program by working from the output to the input.
● You can connect an input to several outputs, but not the same output to several inputs.
● Within the same program path you cannot connect an output to an upstream input. You
can use flags or outputs for such internal recursions.
Rule 3: Cursor and cursor movement

The following applies when you edit a circuit program:
● You can move the cursor when it appears as a solid square:
– Press , , or to move the cursor in the circuit program.
– Press OK to change to select connector/block.
– Press ESC to exit programming mode.
● You select a connector/block when the cursor appears as a solid square:
– Press or to select a connector or a block.
– Confirm with OK.
– Press ESC to return to the previous step.
LOGO!
64 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
3.5 Configuring menu access protection for LOGO!
Rule 4: Planning
● Before you start to create a circuit program, first create a design on paper or program
LOGO! directly using LOGO!Soft Comfort.
● LOGO! can only save complete and faultless circuit programs.

LOGO! provides two access levels, administrator and operator, to limit access to specific
menus in programming mode. As an administrator, you can access all menu commands;
while as an operator, some specific menu commands are not visible (see section "Overview
of LOGO! menus (Page 68)"). LOGO!'s default setting is administrator at delivery, and you
can switch to operator at any time. When switching from operator to administrator, you need
to enter a valid password ("LOGO" by default). LOGO! always saves its access level before
power-off.
Note
The access level of the LOGO! TDE is operator by default, and you can switch it to
administrator with the password "LOGO".
The LOGO! TDE saves its access level before power-off if it connects to the same Base
Module after power-on. If you connect a different Base Module to it, however, the LOGO!
TDE restores its access level to operator after power-on.
The access level setting on the LOGO! TDE is independent of that on the Base Module.
Switching LOGO! from administrator to operator

To switch LOGO!'s access level from administrator to operator, follow these steps:
1. Move the cursor to "①" on the main menu of programming mode: Press or
2. Confirm "①": Press OK
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 65
Programming LOGO!
3. Move the cursor to "②": Press or
4. Confirm "②": Press OK

LOGO! now switches to the access level of operator and returns to the main menu.
Switching LOGO! from operator to administrator

To switch LOGO!'s access level from operator to administrator, follow these steps:
1. Move the cursor to "①" on the main menu of programming mode: Press or

4. Confirm "②": Press OK. The display appears as follows:
LOGO!
66 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
5. Press or to move up and down the alphabet to select your letters (for example,
"LOGO").
6. Confirm the password: Press OK

LOGO! now switches to the access level of administrator and returns to the main menu.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 67
Programming LOGO!
3.6 Overview of LOGO! menus
3.6 Overview of LOGO! menus

The following illustration shows an overview of LOGO! 0BA8 menus:
* These menu commands are visible only with the access level of administrator.
For more details on the menus, refer to the Appendix "LOGO! Basic (Page 331)".
The following illustration shows an overview of LOGO! TDE menus:
LOGO!
68 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program
The LOGO! TDE provides three menus as follows:

● The remote IP selection menu
You can use this menu to select a connected Base Module by entering a specific IP
address.
● The Base Module setting menu
You can use this menu to perform the remote setting of the connected Base Module. This
menu has almost the same menu commands as those on the Base Modules, except for
the menu commands under "①". The menu commands for setting the start screen,
message text, contrast and backlight, and menu language for the Base Module are not
available on the LOGO! TDE.
● The TDE configuration menu
You can use this menu to perform the independent configuration of the LOGO! TDE.
For more details on the menus, refer to the Appendix "LOGO! TDE (Page 337)".

The example below shows how to create a program for your circuit design in LOGO!.
3.7.1 Selecting programming mode

When you connect LOGO! to the power supply and switch it on, the display shows you the
main menu of the programming mode:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 69
Programming LOGO!
The first line is highlighted. Press and to move the highlight bar up and down. Move it
to "①" and confirm with OK. LOGO! opens the programming menu.
The LOGO!'s programming menu is as shown below:
Here you can also move the highlight bar by pressing and . Move the highlight bar to
"②" and confirm with OK.
You are now in the circuit program window. Press OK to enter the program editing mode,
and the cursor appears as a solid square at the "NEW" block. The display now shows as
follows:
Confirm with OK and LOGO! now shows you the first output:
You are now in programming mode. Press and to select the other outputs. Now you
can start to edit your circuit program.
Note
Because you have not yet saved a password for the circuit program in LOGO!, you can
directly enter editing mode. When you select to edit the program after you have saved a
password-protected circuit program, LOGO! prompts you to enter a password and to confirm
it with OK. You can only edit the program after you have entered the correct password
(Page 77).
If you have created your circuit program in LOGO!, you can view it in the circuit program
window by moving cursor on the blocks. LOGO! can display a maximum of 31*31 blocks in
the circuit program window.
LOGO!
70 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
3.7.2 The first circuit program

The following parallel circuit consists of two switches.
Circuit diagram
The corresponding circuit diagram shows as follows:
Translated into a LOGO! circuit program, you use an OR block to control relay K1 at output
Q1.
Circuit program
Switch S1 connects to input I1 and switch S2 connects to input I2. Inputs I1 and I2 connect
to the OR block connectors.
The corresponding layout of the circuit program in LOGO! shows as follows:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 71
Programming LOGO!
Wiring
The corresponding wiring shows as follows:
S1 switches input I1, while S2 switches input I2. The load connects to the relay Q1.
3.7.3 Circuit program input

You can now write the circuit program, starting at the output and working towards the input.
LOGO! initially shows the output:
You will see a solid square at Q1, which is the cursor. The cursor indicates your current
position in the circuit program. You can move the cursor by pressing the , , and
keys. Now press the key. The cursor moves to the left.
At this point you enter only the first (OR) block. Press OK to select editing mode.
LOGO!
72 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
The cursor now appears as a flashing solid square. LOGO! offers you various options here.
Select GF (basic functions) by pressing the key until GF appears, and confirm with OK.
LOGO! now shows the first block from the list of basic functions:
Press OK to select editing mode, which causes LOGO! to display the cursor as a flashing
solid square. Now press or until the OR block appears on the display:
Press OK to confirm your entries and exit the dialog.
You have now entered the first block. LOGO! automatically assigns a block number to each
new block. If you assign a name to the block, LOGO! shows the block name instead of the
block number. You can assign a block name as required:
Press to move the cursor to "B1".
Press OK and the cursor is now displayed as a flashing solid square. Now you can press
and to list the alphabet, numbers and special characters, either in ascending or
descending order. For more information on the available character set, refer to Section
"Assigning a circuit program name (Page 76)".
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 73
Programming LOGO!
After you complete the change, press OK to confirm.

You then connect the block inputs as follows:
Press to position the cursor on In1 and press OK to select editing mode.
Press or to select the digital input list. The first element of the digital input list is the
"Input 1", namely "I1". You can press to move the cursor to the input number, and then
use or to select the desired input (I1 to I24).
Note
Inputs F1, F2, F3, and F4 correspond to the four function keys on the optional LOGO! TDE.
More shift register bits (S1.1 to S4.8), blank connectors (X1 to X64) and analog flags (AM1
to AM64) are available in the 0BA8 device series.
Network digital inputs (NI1 to NI64), network analog inputs (NAI1 to NAI32), network digital
outputs (NQ1 to NQ64), and network analog outputs (NAQ1 to NAQ16) are available for the
0BA8 device series. LOGO! 0BA8 does not include these inputs and outputs until you
configure them in a circuit program in LOGO!Soft Comfort V8.0 and download the program
to your LOGO! 0BA8 device.
After selecting I1, the display now shows as follows:
Press OK to confirm. You have now connected I1 to the input of the OR block.
LOGO!
74 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
Now you connect input I2 to the input of the OR block:

1. Move the cursor to In2: Press or
2. Switch to editing mode: Press OK
3. Select the digital input list: Press or
4. Move the cursor to the input number: Press
5. Select I2: Press or
6. Apply I2: Press OK
You have now connected I2 to the second input of the OR block:
Note
You can invert individual inputs of the basic and special functions; that is, if an input carries a
logical "1" signal, you can cause the circuit program to output a logical "0". You can also
cause LOGO! to invert a logical "0" signal to a logical "1".
To invert an input, move the cursor to the relevant position, for example:
Confirm with OK.

Now press or to invert this input:
Next, press ESC.
You can review your first circuit program by pressing or to move the cursor through the
circuit program.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 75
Programming LOGO!
To exit circuit programming mode and return to the programming menu, press ESC
Note
LOGO! has now saved your circuit program to nonvolatile memory. The circuit program
remains in the LOGO! memory until you explicitly delete it.
You can save the actual values of special functions in the case of a power outage assuming
that these functions support the "Retentive" parameter and that the necessary program
memory is available. By default, LOGO! deactivates the "Retentive" parameter when you
insert a function; to use it, you must enable this option.
3.7.4 Assigning a circuit program name

You can assign your circuit program a name that consists of up to 16 uppercase/lowercase
letters, numbers and special characters.
1. In the main menu in programming mode, press or to move the cursor to "①".
2. To confirm "①", press OK.

3. Press or to move the cursor to "②".
4. To confirm "②", press OK.

Press and to list the alphabet, numbers and special characters, either in ascending or
descending order. You can select any letter, number or character.
To enter a space character, simply move the cursor with to the next position. This
character is the first one in the list.
Examples:
Press once to select an "A". Press four times to select "D", etc.
The following character set is available:
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * +
, - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _
LOGO!
76 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
` { | } ∼ a b c d e f g h i j k
l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Assuming that you want to name your circuit program "ABC", follow these steps:
1. Select " A": Press
2. Move to the next letter: Press
3. Select " B": Press
5. Select " C": Press
6. Confirm the complete name: Press OK
Your circuit program is now named "ABC", and LOGO! returns to the programming menu.
To change the name of your circuit program, proceed in the same way.
Note
You can change the name of the circuit program in programming mode only. If you have
saved a password-protected circuit program, you can change the name of the circuit
program only after you have entered the correct password (refer to Section "Password for
circuit program protection (Page 77)"). You can read the name in both programming mode
and parameter assignment mode.
3.7.5 Password for circuit program protection

You can protect a circuit program from unauthorized access by assigning it a password.
You can assign, change, or deactivate a program password from a LOGO! Basic,
LOGO!Soft Comfort or a LOGO! TDE.
Note
There is only one circuit program protection password that you can assign for LOGO!.
Assigning a program password from LOGO! Basic

A password can have a maximum length of 10 characters, and consists only of uppercase
letters. On LOGO! Basic, you can assign, edit or deactivate the password only in the
programming mode.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 77
Programming LOGO!
To enter a password, follow these steps in the programming menu:

1. Move the cursor to "①": Press or


5. Press or to move up and down the alphabet to select your letters. Because LOGO!
Basic only provides uppercase letters for the password, you can quickly access letters "at
the end" of the alphabet (in this example, English) by using the button:
Press once to select "Z"
Press twice to select "Y", etc.
The display appears as follows:
To enter a password of "AA", for example, the procedure is the same as for entering the
name of the circuit program.
6. Select "A": Press
8. Select "A": Press
The display now appears as follows:
9. Confirm the password: Press OK
LOGO!
78 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
You have now protected your circuit program with the password "AA" and LOGO! returns to
the programming menu.
Note
You can cancel the input of a new password with ESC. In this case, LOGO! Basic returns to
the programming menu without saving the password.
You can also set your password using LOGO!Soft Comfort or LOGO! TDE. You cannot edit
a password-protected circuit program in a LOGO! Base Module or upload it to LOGO!Soft
Comfort unless you enter the correct password.
To allow you to create and edit a circuit program for a protected module (Card), you first
need to assign a password to this new program (Page 289).
Changing the password from LOGO! Basic

You must know the current password in order to change it. From the programming menu,
follow these steps to change the password:

The display now shows:
Enter your old password (in our case: 'AA') by repeating steps 5 through 9 as described
earlier. Press OK.
Now you can enter the new password, for example, "ZZ".

5. Select "Z": Press
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 79
Programming LOGO!
7. Select "Z": Press

8. Confirm your new password: Press OK
You have now set the password to "ZZ", and LOGO! returns to the programming menu.
Deactivating the password from LOGO! Basic

To deactivate the password to allow, for example, another user to edit your circuit program,
you must know your current password (in our example "ZZ").
To deactivate the password, follow these steps in the programming menu:

Enter your current password as described in steps 5 to 7 above. Confirm your entries with
OK.

Alternatively, you can also select "③" and clear the password by leaving the input box
blank.
5. Press any key and LOGO! returns to the programming menu. You have now cleared the
password.
LOGO!
80 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
Note
This action disables the password prompt, and thus permits access without a password.
Leave the password deactivated for quicker progress through the remaining exercises and
examples.
Password: Wrong Password!

If you enter the wrong password and confirm the input with OK, LOGO! Basic does not open
editing mode, and the display shows as follows:
In this case, press any key and LOGO! returns to the programming menu. This repeats itself
over and over again until you enter the correct password.
3.7.6 Switching LOGO! to RUN mode

To switch LOGO! to RUN mode, follow these steps:
1. Return to the main menu: Press ESC
3. Confirm "①": Press OK. The display now shows:
4. Press to move the cursor to "②" and press OK.

LOGO! runs the circuit program and shows the following display:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 81
Programming LOGO!
The start screen of LOGO! displays one of the following:

● Date and current time-of-day (only for versions with real-time clock). This element flashes
if you have not set the date and time.
● Digital inputs
● Parameter assignment menu
You can select the default setting for the start screen that LOGO! displays in RUN mode. For
more information, see Section "Setting the start screen (Page 275)".
LOGO!
82 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
Viewing the analog value changes

You can view the value changes of each analog I/O in the form of a trend curve when LOGO!
is in RUN mode. For example, to view the value changes of AI3, follow these steps:
1. Switch LOGO! to RUN mode.
2. Scroll the display to the AI screen form (3/9): Press or
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 83
Programming LOGO!
3. Move the cursor to AI3: Press or

4. Press OK to confirm your selection. The display now shows the AI3 value changes in the
form of a curve, for example:
The display refreshes continuously and the curve shifts to the left of the display bit by bit.
You can press or to move the screen form to the left/right in order to view the
earlier/later value changes.
What is meant by: "LOGO! is in RUN"?

In RUN mode, LOGO! executes the circuit program. LOGO! first reads the status at the
inputs, determines the status of the outputs by means of the circuit program, and switches
these on or off according to your settings.
This is how LOGO! indicates the I/O status:
In this example, only the inputs I1and I15 and the outputs Q8 and Q12 are set "high".
LOGO!
84 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
Status indication on the display

Using the example, you can see how LOGO! displays the input and output states:
3.7.7 Second circuit program

Up to this point, you have successfully created your first circuit program, assigned it a name,
and optionally a program password. In this section you will learn how to modify existing
circuit programs and how to use the special functions.
Using this second circuit program, you will learn how to perform the following tasks:
● Add a block to an existing circuit program
● Select a block for a special function
● Assign parameters
Modifying circuits
You will use the first circuit program as a basis for the second, with some slight modifications.
First of all take a look at the circuit diagram for the second circuit program:
This is the circuit program layout in LOGO!:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 85
Programming LOGO!
You can see the OR block and the output relay Q1 that you used in the first circuit program.
The only difference is the new off-delay block.
Editing the circuit program

Follow these steps to edit the circuit program:
1. Switch LOGO! to programming mode. For additional details, see the topic "The four
golden rules for operating LOGO! (Page 64)".
2. On the main menu, move the cursor to "①": Press or
3. Confirm "①": Press OK. The display now shows:
4. On the programming menu, move the cursor to "②": Press or

5. Confirm "②": Press OK. If required, enter your password at the prompt and confirm with
OK.
6. In the circuit program window, press OK to activate the cursor as a solid square.
You can now modify the current circuit program.
Adding a block to a circuit program

Press to move the cursor to B1 (B1 is the number of the OR block):
Insert the new block at this position.

Confirm with OK, and the cursor appears as a flashing solid square.
LOGO!
86 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
Press twice to select the SF list. The SF list contains the special function blocks.
Press OK.
LOGO! displays the block of the first special function:
When you select a special or basic function block, LOGO! shows you the relevant function
block and positions the solid square cursor on the block. Press OK to enter the editing mode,
and the cursor appears as a flashing solid square. Press or to select the required block.
Select your block (off-delay, see the next figure), and then press OK:
Press to move the cursor to Trg, and then press OK.

Press or to select B1 and confirm with OK.
LOGO! automatically connects the uppermost input of the new block to B1, which you had
previously connected to Q1. Note that you can only interconnect digital inputs with digital
outputs or analog inputs with analog outputs. LOGO! otherwise removes the 'old' block.
The off-delay block has two inputs and a parameter. At the top is the trigger input (Trg) you
use to start the off-delay time. In our example, the OR block B1 triggers the off-delay. You
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 87
Programming LOGO!
reset the time and the output with a signal at the reset input (R). You set the off-delay time at
parameter T of the Par.
Assigning block parameters

Now you set the off-delay time T:
1. Move the cursor to Par: Press
LOGO! shows the parameters in the parameter assignment window:
To change the time value, follow these steps:

1. Move the cursor to the time value: Press
3. Press and to position the cursor.
4. Press and to modify the value at the relevant position.
5. Confirm your entries with OK.
Setting the time

Set the time T = 12:00 minutes:
1. Move the cursor to the first digit: Press or
2. Select the digit "1": Press or
3. Shift the cursor to the second digit: Press or
4. Select digit "2": Press or
5. Move the cursor to the unit: Press or
6. Select the timebase "m" (for minutes): Press or
LOGO!
88 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
Showing/hiding parameters - the parameter protection mode

If you want to show/hide the parameter and allow/prevent its modification in parameter
assignment mode, follow these steps:
1. Move the cursor to "-/": Press or
3. Select the protection mode: Press or
The display should now show:
Enabling/disabling retentivity
To decide whether you want to retain your current data after a power failure or not, follow
these steps:
1. Move the cursor to "-/": Press or
3. Move the cursor to the retentivity setting: Press or
4. Select the retentivity setting: Press or
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 89
Programming LOGO!
Note
For further information on the protection mode, refer to the topic "Parameter protection
(Page 133)".
For further information on retentivity, refer to the topic "Retentivity (Page 133)".
You can modify the protection mode and retentivity setting only in programming mode. This
is not possible in parameter assignment mode.
LOGO! displays protection mode ("+" or "-") and retentivity ("R" or "/") settings only where
you can actually change these settings.
Verification of the circuit program

You have now completed the program branch for Q1 and LOGO! shows you the output Q1.
You can once again view the circuit program on the display. Use the keys to browse the
circuit program; that is, press or to move from block to block, and to move
between the inputs at a block.
Closing the programming mode

When you finish programming, you can exit the programming mode by following these steps:
1. Return to the programming menu: Press ESC
2. Return to the main menu: Press ESC

LOGO! is back in RUN mode:
LOGO!
90 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
3.7.8 Deleting a block

Consider the case where you want to delete the block B2 from your circuit program and
connect B1 directly to Q1.
To delete this block, follow these steps:

1. Switch LOGO! to programming mode.
(As a reminder, refer to the topic "The four golden rules for operating LOGO! (Page 64)").
2. Select "①": Press or
3. Confirm"①": Press OK
4. Select "②": Press or

(If required, enter your password and confirm with OK.)
6. Press OK in the circuit program window, and the cursor now appears as a solid square.
7. Move the cursor to the Q1 block and then press OK.
8. Move the cursor to B2, the input of Q1, and confirm with OK.
9. Now replace block B2 with block B1 at output Q1.

– Move the cursor to the 2 in B2: Press
– Select 'B1': Press
– Apply 'B1': Press OK
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 91
Programming LOGO!
Result: LOGO! deletes block B2 from the circuit and connects the output of B1 directly to
output Q1.
3.7.9 Deleting block groups

Consider the case where you want to delete blocks B1 and B2 from the second circuit
program example (refer to the "Second circuit program (Page 85)" topic).
To delete these two blocks from that program, follow these steps:
(As a reminder, refer to the topic "The four golden rules for operating LOGO! (Page 64)").
2. To select "①": Press or
3. To confirm "①": Press OK

4. To select "②": Press or
5. To confirm "②": Press OK

7. Move the cursor to the Q1 block and then press OK.
LOGO!
92 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
8. Move the cursor to B2, the input of Q1, and confirm with OK.
9. Now set the blank connector at output Q1 instead of block B2:

– Select the blank connector: Press or
– Apply the blank connector: Press OK
Result: LOGO! deletes block B2 and all blocks that connect to B2 (in this case, block B1)
from the circuit.
3.7.10 Correcting programming errors

You can easily correct programming errors in LOGO!. Providing that you are still in editing
mode, you can revert one step by pressing ESC. If you have already configured all inputs,
simply reconfigure the faulty input:
1. Move the cursor to the faulty position.
2. Change to editing mode: Press OK.
3. Enter the correct input circuit.
You can only replace a block with a block that has exactly the same number of inputs.
However, you can delete the old block and then insert a new one. You can choose any new
block.
3.7.11 Selecting analog output values for RUN/STOP transition

You can set the behavior of up to eight analog outputs when LOGO! changes from RUN
mode to STOP mode. To set the behavior for analog outputs for a RUN-to-STOP transition,
follow these steps:
1. In the programming menu, move the cursor to "①": Press or
2. Select "①": Press OK

3. Move the cursor to "'AQ": Press or
4. Select "AQ": Press OK
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 93
Programming LOGO!
6. Select "②": Press OK

LOGO! shows the following display:
The circle with a dot before "④" above indicates the current setting for the analog output
channels.
You can select either "③" or "④". The default setting is "④" which means that LOGO!
holds the values of the analog outputs at their last values. A setting of "③" means that
LOGO! sets the analog output values to specific values, which you can configure. When
LOGO! changes from RUN mode to STOP mode, the values of the analog outputs
change as well, depending on the setting.
7. Select the desired output setting: Press or .
8. Confirm your entry: Press OK.
Defining a specific analog output value

To output a specific analog value at the analog outputs, follow these steps:

The display shows:
LOGO!
94 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
3. Select a desired analog output and press OK.

4. Enter a specific output value for the analog output.
5. To confirm your entry, press OK.
3.7.12 Defining the type of analog outputs

Analog outputs can be either 0..10V/0..20mA, which is the default, or 4..20mA.
To define the type of analog outputs, follow these steps starting from the programming menu:
2. Select "①": Press OK

3. Move the cursor to "AQ": Press or
4. Select "AQ": Press OK
6. Select "②": Press OK

LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 95
Programming LOGO!
7. Move the cursor to the desired AQ, and press OK.

LOGO! indicates the defined type for the analog channel by a circle with a dot.
8. Select either 0..10V/0..20mA (default) or 4..20mA: Press or
9. Confirm your selection: Press OK.
3.7.13 Setting the power-on delay of LOGO!

You can set a power-on delay for LOGO! in order to make sure all the connected expansion
modules are powered on and ready to use before LOGO! runs the circuit programs.
To set the power-on delay, follow these steps:
1. In the programming menu, move the cursor to "①": Press or
2. Confirm "①": Press OK.

4. Confirm "②": Press OK. LOGO! shows the following display:
5. Press or to increase or decrease the delay time by 0.2 s. You can also press and
hold down or to quickly increase or decrease the time.
6. Confirm your setting: Press OK.
LOGO!
96 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
3.7.14 Clearing the circuit program and password

To clear a circuit program and the password if one is defined, follow these steps:
1. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode. LOGO! opens the main menu:
2. On the main menu, press or to move the cursor to "①". Press OK. LOGO! opens
3. On the programming menu, move the cursor to "②": Press or
5. If you are sure that you want to clear the circuit program in the memory, move the cursor
to "③" and confirm with OK. LOGO! clears the circuit program and password.
To cancel clearing of the circuit program, leave the cursor at "④" and press OK.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 97
Programming LOGO!
3.7.15 Summertime/wintertime conversion

You can enable or disable automatic summertime/wintertime conversion.
Note
Summertime refers to "daylight saving time" and wintertime refers to "standard time" in the
United States.
To enable/disable automatic S/W Time conversion in programming mode:

1. Switch LOGO! to programming mode. LOGO! displays the main menu.


6. Move the cursor to "③": Press or
LOGO!
98 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
7. Confirm "③": Press OK

The current setting of automatic S/W Time conversion is indicated by a circle with a dot.
The default setting is "④": disabled.
What is shown on the display?:
– "④": LOGO! disables automatic S/W time conversion.
– "⑤" represents the start and end of European summertime.
– "⑥" represents the start and end of summertime in the United Kingdom.
– "⑦" represents the start and end of daylight saving time (summertime) in the United
States prior to 2007.
– "⑧" represents the start and end of daylight saving time (summertime) in the United
States in 2007 and later years.
– "⑨" represents the start and end of Australian summertime.
– "⑩" represents the start and end of Australian/ Tasmanian summertime.
– "⑪" represents the start and end of New Zealand summertime.
– "⑫": Here you can enter any month, day and time zone difference.
The table below lists the preset conversions:
Menu Start of summertime End of summertime Time zone

command difference Δ
⑤ Last Sunday in March: Last Sunday in October: 60 minutes
02:00→03:00 03:00→02:00
⑥ Last Sunday in March: Last Sunday in October: 60 minutes
01:00→02:00 02:00→01:00
⑦ First Sunday in April: Last Sunday in October: 60 minutes
02:00→03:00 02:00→01:00
⑧ Second Sunday in March: First Sunday in November: 60 minutes
02:00→03:00 02:00→01:00
⑨ Last Sunday in October: Last Sunday in March: 60 minutes
02:00→03:00 03:00→02:00
⑩ First Sunday in October: Last Sunday in March: 60 minutes
02:00→03:00 03:00→02:00
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 99
Programming LOGO!
Menu Start of summertime End of summertime Time zone

command difference Δ
⑪ First Sunday in October: Third Sunday in March: 60 minutes
02:00→03:00 03:00→02:00
⑫ Customized month and day; Customized month and day; User-defined
02:00→02:00 + Time zone Time zone difference: (resolution in
difference 03:00→03:00 - Time zone dif- minutes)
ference
8. To enable the summertime/winter time conversion and set parameters, press or to

select the desired conversion and then press OK to confirm.
Note
You can specify a time zone difference Δ between 0 and 180 minutes.
Enabling/disabling automatic S/W Time conversion in parameter assignment mode

If you want to enable/disable automatic S/W Time conversion in parameter assignment
mode, select "①" in the parameter assignment menu, then menus "②" and "③". You can
now enable/disable automatic S/W Time conversion.
User-defined parameters
If none of the parameters/conversions apply to your country, follow these steps to customize
the settings:
1. Move the cursor to the menu item "①": Press or
2. Confirm with OK.

The display shows:
LOGO!
100 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
For example, consider an example where you want to configure the following parameters:
● Start of summertime = 31st March
● End of summertime = 1st November
● Time difference of 120 minutes
To configure these settings, follow these steps:
1. Press or to move the flashing solid square/cursor.
2. Press and to change the value at the cursor position.
The display shows:
3. Confirm all your entries with OK.

You have now customized the summertime/wintertime conversion.
Note
Summertime/wintertime conversion only functions when LOGO! is operating in RUN or
STOP mode. It does not function when the internal real–time clock of LOGO! continues
operation after a power failure (refer to Section "Backup of the real-time clock (Page 133)").
3.7.16 Synchronization
You can enable/disable time synchronization between LOGO! and a connected
communications module by means of the setup menu.
When you enable synchronization, LOGO! can receive the time-of-day from a
communications module.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 101
Programming LOGO!
Regardless of whether you enable or disable synchronization, LOGO! always sends the
time-of-day to the expansion modules at power-up, every hour (STOP mode or RUN mode),
and when the time of day changes (either after a clock reset or summertime/wintertime
conversion).
Note
When using a LOGO! Base Module with digital or analog expansion modules, but without a
communications module, you must not activate time synchronization. You must check
whether time synchronization is disabled.
Enabling/disabling synchronization in programming mode

To enable or disable time synchronization, follow these steps:
1. Switch LOGO! to programming mode. LOGO! displays the main menu.


LOGO!
102 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
3.8 Configuring additional functions for LOGO!
7. Apply "③": Press OK

LOGO! indicates the current setting of the automatic synchronization function by the
circle with a dot. The default setting is "④"; that is, the synchronization is disabled.
8. To enable synchronization, press or to select "⑤", and then confirm with OK.
Enabling/disabling synchronization in parameter assignment mode

If you want to enable/disable automatic synchronization in parameter assignment mode,
select "①" in the parameter assignment menu , then menus "②" and "③". You can now
enable/disable automatic synchronization.

After you have successfully created the second circuit program, you can configure additional
functions by means of the following menu commands:
● Network
● Diagnostics
UDF and Data Log

You can configure the UDF and Data Log functions only from LOGO!Soft Comfort. After you
have configured them in LOGO!Soft Comfort and downloaded them to the LOGO! 0BA8
device, you can then edit elements connected to these functions from the device:
● UDFs (User-Defined Functions)
● Data Log
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 103
Programming LOGO!
Network digital and analog I/O

You can configure the following connectors representing network digital or analog
inputs/outputs only from LOGO!Soft Comfort:
● Network digital inputs
● Network analog inputs
● Network digital outputs
● Network analog outputs
Note
If your circuit program in a LOGO! 0BA8 device contains any network digital or analog
inputs/outputs, you can only edit the "Par" parameter of function blocks from LOGO!. You
can not edit any of the rest of the circuit program from the device.
3.8.1 Configuring network settings

A LOGO! 0BA8 device can establish network communication with other LOGO! 0BA8
devices, SIMATIC S7 PLCs, a SIMATIC HMI, or a PC with LOGO!Soft Comfort V8.0 (For
more detailed information, refer to the Maximum LOGO! network setup (Page 27) topic). You
can configure the LOGO! 0BA8 network only from LOGO!Soft Comfort V8.0 . From LOGO!
0BA8, you can configure your LOGO!'s network settings including IP address, subnet mask
and gateway.
Note
You can configure LOGO!'s network settings including IP adress, subnet mask and gateway
with the access level of administrator only. With the access level of operator, you can only
view but cannot change the network settings.
Configuring the network settings

LOGO! 0BA8 provides a menu command for configuring network settings.
2. Press or to move the cursor to "①".
3. Press OK to confirm "①".
LOGO!
104 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
4. Press or to move the cursor to "②".
5. Press OK to confirm "②". LOGO! displays the following view:
6. The display now shows the default IP address of your LOGO!. To change the setting,
press OK. When the cursor appears in a flashing solid square, press or to move the
cursor to a position where you want to modify the number, then press or to increase
or decrease the number. To confirm your change, press OK.
LOGO! stores up to four addresses that you set previously. To view your last settings,
press to move the cursor to the " " symbol, and then press OK to open a drop-down
list, for example:
You can press or to select a previously configured address in the list, and then
press OK to comfirm.
7. Press or to move to the subnet mask setting. The default subnet mask is as shown
above. To change the setting, press OK. When the cursor appears in a flashing solid
square, press or to move the cursor to a position where you want to modify the
number, then press or to increase or decrease the number. To confirm your change,
press OK.
8. Press to move to the gateway address setting. The default gateway is as shown above.
To change the setting, press OK. When the cursor appears in a flashing solid square,
press or to move the cursor to a position where you want to modify the number,
then press or to increase or decrease the number. To confirm your change, press
OK.
Transferring the circuit program to LOGO!Soft Comfort

After you have finished the network settings, you can transfer the circuit program from LOGO!
to LOGO!Soft Comfort using the transfer command LOGO!→PC in LOGO!Soft Comfort. For
further information on uploading the circuit program to LOGO!Soft Comfort with this transfer
menu command, refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 105
Programming LOGO!
3.8.2 Configuring a UDF (User-Defined Function)

You can configure UDF (User-Defined Function) blocks only from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
A UDF block is a preconfigured circuit program that you create in LOGO!Soft Comfort. You
can add it to an existing circuit program as you do with a function block. For a detailed
description of the UDF configuration in LOGO!Soft Comfort, refer to the Online Help for
LOGO!Soft Comfort.
If your circuit program in LOGO! contains a UDF block, you can configure elements
connected to the block. For more information of configuration of UDF elements from LOGO!
0BA8, refer to the topic UDF (User-Defined Function) (Page 257).
3.8.3 Configuring the Data Log

You can configure the Data Log block only from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
You can configure a maximum of one Data Log for your circuit program using LOGO!Soft
Comfort. The Data Log is used to record process measurement variables of the selected
function blocks. For a detailed description of configuration of the Data Log function in
LOGO!Soft Comfort, refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
If your circuit program in LOGO! contains the Data Log block, you can configure elements
connected to the block. For more information of configuration of Data Log elements from
LOGO! 0BA8, refer to the topic Data log (Page 261).
3.8.4 Viewing network inputs/outputs

LOGO!Soft Comfort provides you with the following connectors representing network
input/output blocks:
● Network digital inputs (identified with an NI in LOGO!)
● Network analog inputs (identified with an NAI in LOGO!)
● Network digital outputs (identified with an NQ in LOGO!)
● Network analog outputs (identified with an NAQ in LOGO!)
Network digital or analog inputs can connect with the inputs of function blocks. Network
digital or analog outputs can connect with the outputs of function blocks.
If your circuit program contains a network digital/analog input, LOGO! can read a
digital/analog value from another circuit program in a networked device. If your circuit
program contains a network digital/analog output, LOGO! can write its digital/analog output
value to another networked 0BA8 device in slave mode.
Note
You can only configure these network connectors for your circuit program from LOGO!Soft
Comfort. If your circuit program in LOGO! contains a network connector, you can not make
any edits to the circuit program from the LOGO! onboard display.
LOGO!
106 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
Viewing network connectors in LOGO!

Consider a circuit program where a network digital input NI1 connects to the function block
B5. B5 is connected to Q4. To view this network input, follow these steps:
3. Confirm"①": Press OK

7. Move the cursor to the B5 block and then press OK. LOGO! shows the following display:
You can see that there is a network digital input NI1 connected at the first input of B5.
The following views are examples of network digital and analog outputs in LOGO!:
Available network input/output blocks in LOGO!Soft Comfort

The following network I/O blocks are available for you to create your circuit program in
LOGO!Soft Comfort:
● Network digital inputs: NI1 to NI64
● Network analog inputs: NAI1 to NAI32
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 107
Programming LOGO!
● Network digital outputs: NQ1 to NQ64

● Network analog outputs: NAQ1 to NAQ16
3.8.5 Changing LOGO! to master/slave mode

LOGO! 0BA8 provides a menu command for network communication settings. This section
shows you how to change LOGO!'s network communication mode.
A LOGO! 0BA8 device works in either master or slave communication mode.
Master mode versus slave mode

A LOGO! 0BA8 in master mode supports client-server communication with SIMATIC S7
PLCs, a SIMATIC HMI or other 0BA8 devices across Ethernet. This LOGO! can additionally
act as a master to communicate with one or more 0BA8 devices in slave mode.
A LOGO! in slave mode functions as a LOGO! expansion module. LOGO! slave devices do
not require a circuit program. A master LOGO! can read one or more slave LOGO!'s
digital/analog input/output values and write its own digital/analog output values to these
slaves. This helps LOGO! achieve network I/O expansion.
Note
A LOGO! in slave mode can also have its own expansion modules. It also supports a
maximum of 24 digital inputs, 8 analog inputs, 20 digital outputs and 8 analog outputs.
Changing LOGO! from master mode to slave mode

1. In the main menu in programming mode, move the cursor to "①": Press or

LOGO!
108 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
5. Move the cursor to ③": Press or
7. In this view, you enter the IP address of the LOGO! that you want to configure to be the
master of your slave LOGO!. To change the setting, press OK. When the cursor appears
in a flashing solid square, press or to move the cursor through the numbers. Press
or to change the number.
8. Confirm the setting: Press OK
You have now successfully changed LOGO! from master mode to slave mode. LOGO!
restarts automatically and then displays the main menu. Stepping into the following view,
you can see that your LOGO! is now in slave mode:
Note
When LOGO! is in slave mode, you can not edit the circuit program from the slave LOGO!.
You cannot change LOGO! to master/slave mode in parameter assignment mode.
Changing LOGO! from slave mode to master mode

LOGO! is now in slave mode:

You have now successfully changed LOGO! from slave mode to master mode. LOGO!
restarts automatically and then displays the main menu.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 109
Programming LOGO!
Alternatively, you can change LOGO! from slave mode to master mode from LOGO!Soft
Comfort. If you download a circuit program to a LOGO! in slave mode from LOGO!Soft
Comfort, you are prompted to switch LOGO! to master mode to complete the downloading.
For more information, refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
3.8.6 Diagnosing errors from LOGO!

LOGO! 0BA8 supports error event diagnostics. You can perform the following actions from
LOGO!'s diagnostics menu:
● View software status and errors:
– S7 connection error
– Firmware version of LOGO!
● View hardware status and errors:
– Ethernet connection error
– Micro SD card error (for example, card read/write error, card is not inserted, or card is
full)
– EM (expansion module) status and error (for example, bus error and configuration
update)
– MAC address of LOGO!
● View and clear the event log, and check the availability of a specific IP address
● Toggle an error event alert
Viewing the software status and errors of LOGO!

To view the software status and errors, follow these steps:
1. In the main menu, move the cursor to "①": Press or

3. LOGO! shows you the diagnostics menu. Move the cursor to "②": Press or
LOGO!
110 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
4. Confirm "②": Press OK. LOGO! shows you the following display:
5. You can select "③" to view the real-time status of the S7 connection or "④" to view the
firmware version of LOGO!.
After you select "③", you can press or to view the status of each S7 connection.
Viewing the hardware status and errors of LOGO!

To view the hardware status and errors, follow these steps:
1. In the main menu, move the cursor to "①": Press or

3. LOGO! shows you the diagnostics menu. Move the cursor to "②": Press or
4. Confirm "②": Press OK. LOGO! shows you the following display:
5. You can select the following menu commands to view the corresponding hardware status
and errors:
– ③: To view the status of the Ethernet interface of LOGO!. If the Ethernet cable is not
connected, an error appears.
– ④: To view the status of the micro SD card. You may find an error event under this
menu command when no card is inserted, the card is full, or a read/write error occurs.
– ⑤: To view the real-time status of the connected expansion module(s). You can find
the number of the expansion modules and the total I/O number under this menu
command.
– ⑥: To view the MAC address of LOGO!
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 111
Programming LOGO!
Viewing error information

To view the errors detected, follow these steps:
1. In the diagnostics menu shown below, move the cursor to "①": Press or
2. Confirm "①": Press OK.

4. Confirm "②": Press OK. LOGO! displays all errors detected. You can press or to
view each error record. Press ESC or OK to return to the previous menus.
Clearing error information

To clear all errors, follow these steps:

LOGO!
112 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
6. Confirm "③": Press OK. LOGO! clears all error messages and displays as follows:
Diagnosing a specific IP address

You can check the availability of a specific IP address by following these steps:

4. Confirm "②": Press OK. LOGO! displays the following view:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 113
Programming LOGO!
5. To enter an IP address, Press OK. When the cursor appears in a flashing solid square,
press or to move the cursor to a position where you want to modify the number,
then press or to increase or decrease the number.
6. Press OK to confirm your input.
LOGO! stores up to four addresses that you entered previously. To view your last inputs,
press to move the cursor to the " " symbol, and then press OK to open a drop-down
list, for example:
You can press or to select a previously configured address in the list, and then
press OK to comfirm.
Toggling an error alert

You can enable/disable an error alert by following these steps:
1. In the diagnostic menu shown below, move the cursor to "①": Press or

3. The circle with a dot indicates the current setting. To change the setting: Press or
4. Confirm your selection: Press OK. LOGO! returns to the previous view.
If you enable the error alert, when an error occurs, the LOGO! display turns to red backlight,
reminding you that LOGO! detects an error. You can go to the diagnostics menu to view and
clear the error.
LOGO!
114 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
3.9 Memory space and circuit program size

The size of a circuit program in LOGO! is limited by the memory space.
Memory areas
● Program memory:
LOGO! allows only a limited number of blocks in your circuit program.
The second limitation is based on the maximum number of bytes a circuit program can
contain. You can determine the total number of bytes used by adding up the number of
bytes used for the relevant function blocks.
● Retentive memory (Rem):
In this area, LOGO! stores values that are retentive; for example, the hours counter value.
Blocks with optional retentivity use this memory area only if you have enabled the
retentivity function.
Resources available in LOGO!

A circuit program in LOGO! can occupy the following maximum resources:
LOGO! device series Bytes Blocks REM

LOGO! 0BA8 8500 400 250
LOGO! monitors memory utilization, and offers only those functions from the lists for which it
can actually provide sufficient memory space.
Memory requirements
The table below shows an overview of the memory requirements for the basic and special
function blocks in LOGO! 0BA8:
Function Program Rem

memory memory*
Basic functions
AND 12 -
AND with edge evaluation 12 -
NAND (not AND) 12 -
NAND with edge evaluation 12 -
OR 12 -
NOR (not OR) 12 -
XOR (exclusive OR) 8 -
NOT (Negation) 8 -
Special functions
Timers
On-delay 12 3
Off-delay 16 3
On-/Off-delay 16 3
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 115
Programming LOGO!
Function Program Rem

memory memory*
Retentive on-delay 16 3
Wiping relay (pulse output) 12 3
Edge triggered wiping relay 20 4
Asynchronous pulse generator 16 3
Random generator 16 -
Stairway lighting switch 16 3
Multiple function switch 20 3
Weekly timer 24 -
Yearly timer 12 -
Astronomical clock 40 -
Stopwatch 28 19
Counters
Up/down counter 32 5
Hours counter 36 13
Threshold trigger 20 -
Analog
Analog threshold trigger 20 -
Analog differential trigger 20 -
Analog comparator 24 -
Analog watchdog 24 -
Analog amplifier 12 -
Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) 32 -
Mathematic instruction 24 -
Mathematic instruction error detection 16 1
Analog multiplexer 20 -
Analog ramp 40 -
PI controller 44 2
Analog filter 20 -
Max/Min 20 7
Average value 32 20
Others
Latching relay 12 1
Pulse relay 12 1
Message texts 12 -
Softkey 12 2
Shift register 16 1
LOGO!
116 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Programming LOGO!
*: Bytes in the Rem memory area if you have enabled retentivity
Note
Since a UDF block is a preconfigured circuit program that you create from LOGO!Soft
Comfort for your LOGO! device, the memory size (program memory and Rem memory) of a
UDF block depends upon the size of the function blocks contained in the UDF.
Utilization of memory areas

LOGO! indicates that there is insufficient memory space by not allowing you to add a block
to your circuit program. LOGO! offers you only the blocks for which it can provide sufficient
memory space. If LOGO! memory space is insufficient to hold any additional blocks, the
system denies access to the block list.
If memory space is full, optimize your circuit program or install another LOGO!.
Calculating memory requirements

When calculating the memory requirements of a circuit, you must always take into account
all individual areas of memory.
Example:
The sample circuit program contains:
Block no. Function Memory area

Bytes Blocks REM
B1 OR 12 1 -
B2 AND 12 1 -
B3 Yearly timer 12 1 -
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 117
Programming LOGO!
Block no. Function Memory area

B4 On-delay* 12 1 3
B5 Stairway lighting switch 16 1 3
B6 AND 12 1 -
Resources used by the circuit program 76 6 6
Memory space limits in LOGO! 8500 400 250
Still available in LOGO! 8424 394 244
*: Configured with retentivity.

This means that this circuit program fits in LOGO!.
Indication of available memory space

To view the amount of free memory space in LOGO!, follow these steps:
(As a reminder, refer to the topic "The four golden rules for operating LOGO! (Page 64)".


LOGO!
118 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions 4
LOGO! provides you with various elements in programming mode, and organizes them in the
following lists:
● Connector list (Connector) (Page 119)
● ↓GF: List of the basic functions AND, OR, ... (Page 124)
● ↓SF: List of the special functions (Page 136)
● List of reusable blocks configured in the circuit program
LOGO! 0BA8 can additionally provide you with the following elements in programming mode,
if you have previously configured them in your circuit program using LOGO!Soft Comfort:
● UDF: List of user-defined function blocks configured in the circuit program
● L: A Data Log function block configured in the circuit program
List contents
All lists show the elements available in LOGO!. Usually, this includes all connectors, basic
functions, and special functions.
LOGO! does not show all elements if:
● You cannot add additional blocks.
This occurs wthen the memory space is insufficient or when you have reached the
maximum number of blocks.
● A specific block's memory space requirement (Page 115) would exceed the space
available in LOGO!.
● You have created program elements in LOGO!Soft Comfort but have not downloaded the
program to LOGO!.
4.1 Constants and connectors

Constants and connectors represent inputs, outputs, flags, constants, and network digital
and analog inputs/outputs.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 119
LOGO! functions
Inputs
● Digital inputs
Digital inputs begin with the letter I. The number of the digital inputs (I1, I2, ...)
corresponds to the number of the input connectors of the LOGO! Base Module and of the
connected digital modules, in the order of their installation. You can use the fast digital
inputs I3, I4, I5, and I6 of the LOGO! versions LOGO! 12/24 RCE, LOGO! 12/24 RCEo,
LOGO! 24 CE and LOGO! 24 CEo as fast counters.
Note
To avoid that the LOGO! Base Module fails to read input signals because its built-in MCU
(Microcontroller Unit) is too sensitive and runs much faster than those in previous LOGO!
devices, an on-/off-delay function is designed for LOGO!:
• For LOGO! 230RCE and LOGO! 230RCEo, a 25 ms on-delay time and a 20 ms off-
delay time are defined for digital inputs I1 to I8.
• For all the other LOGO! versions, a 5 ms on-delay time and a 5 ms off-delay time are
defined for all the digital inputs.
Besides, when the LOGO! Base Module is in slave mode, a 5 ms on-delay time and a
100 ms signal-retentive-time are defined for all the digital inputs.
● Analog inputs
The LOGO! versions LOGO! 24 CE, LOGO! 24 CEo, LOGO! 12/24 RCE and LOGO
12/24 RCEo have the inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8, which you can also program for use as AI3,
AI4, AI1 and AI2 inputs. As described in topic "Setting the number of AIs in LOGO!
(Page 275)", you can configure these modules to use either two analog inputs (AI1 and
AI2), or all four. LOGO! interprets signals at the I1, I2, I7 and I8 inputs as digital values,
and those at the AI3, AI4, AI1 and AI2 inputs as analog values. Note that AI3
corresponds to I1 and AI4 corresponds to I2. This numbering preserves the previous
correspondence of AI1 to I7 and AI2 to I8 that was available with the 0BA5 series. LOGO!
numbers the inputs of a connected analog module according to the already existing
analog inputs. See topic "Maximum setup with expansion modules (Page 29)" for
example setups. In programming mode, when you select the input signal of a special
function that takes an analog input, LOGO! offers the analog inputs AI1 to AI8, analog
flags AM1 to AM64, analog outputs AQ1 to AQ8, and the block numbers of functions with
analog outputs.
LOGO!
120 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Outputs
● Digital outputs
Digital outputs begin with the letter Q. The output numbers (Q1, Q2, ... Q20) correspond
with the numbers of the output connectors at the LOGO! Base Module and with those of
the expansion modules, in their order of installation.
LOGO! 0BA8 also provides 64 blank outputs and identifies them with the letter x. You
cannot reuse the blank outputs in a circuit program. The blank outputs differ from flags,
for example, which you can reuse. A blank output, for example, is useful for the special
function "Message texts" (Page 204), if only the message text is of significance to a circuit
program.
● Analog outputs
Analog outputs begin with the letters AQ. Eight analog outputs are available, namely AQ1,
AQ2,... AQ8. You can only connect an analog output with the analog input of a function,
an analog flag AM or an analog output connector.
The following figure shows an example LOGO! configuration and the numbering of the
inputs and outputs for the circuit program.
Note
LOGO! 0BA8 supports the graphical display of the analog value changes in the form of a
trend curve on the onboard display. You can easily monitor each analog I/O in use by means
of the trend curves when LOGO! is in RUN mode. For more information on how to view the
trend curve, refer to "Viewing the analog changes (Page 81)".
Flag blocks
The letters M or AM identify flag blocks. These are virtual outputs, which output the value of
their inputs. LOGO! 0BA8 provides 64 digital flags M1 to M64 and 64 analog flags AM1 to
AM64.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 121
LOGO! functions
Startup flag M8
LOGO! sets flag M8 in the first cycle of the circuit program. You can thus use it as a startup
flag in your circuit program. LOGO! resets M8 at the end of the first cycle.
You can use the M8 flag in all further cycles for setting, deletion and evaluation procedures
in the same way as other flags.
Backlight flags M25, M26, M28 to M31

The following flags control the backlight colors of the LOGO! onboard display or the LOGO!
TDE:
Backlight display Flag Remarks

White M25 The color white means LOGO!
is in RUN mode.
M26 The color white means LOGO!
TDE is in RUN mode.
Amber M28 The color amber means LOGO!
is in programming mode or
parameter assignment mode.
M30 The color amber means LOGO!
TDE is in programming mode,
parameter assignment mode or
TDE setting mode.
Red M29 The color red means LOGO!
has a diagnosis error.
M31 The color red means LOGO!
TDE has a diagnostics error.
Note: The backlight lifetime of the LOGO! TDE is 20,000 hours.
Message text character set flag M27

The M27 flag selects between the two character sets that LOGO! uses to display message
texts. State 0 corresponds to Character Set 1, and state 1 corresponds to Character Set 2. If
M27=0 (low), LOGO! only displays message texts configured for Character Set 1; If M27=1
(high), LOGO! only displays message texts configured for Character Set 2. If you do not
include M27 in the circuit program, message texts display in the character set that you
selected from either LOGO!Soft Comfort or a LOGO! device.
Note
• The output of the flag always carries the signal of the previous program cycle. This value
does not change within the same program cycle.
• You can read or write flags from the network. If you have not added any special flags in
the diagram, but written them from the network, they can still work except M27. So if you
want to control character sets by M27, you must add it in the diagram first, and you can
connect M27 to NI blocks to control it from the network.
LOGO!
122 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Shift register bits

LOGO! provides read-only shift register bits S1.1 to S4.8. Only the "Shift register" (Page 216)
special function can modify shift register bit values.
Cursor keys
Up to four cursor keys are available to you, namely C , C , C and C ("C" = "Cursor").
Cursor keys are programmed for the circuit program in the same way as other inputs. You
can program cursor keys in the corresponding display while the system is in RUN (Page 81) ,
and in an active message text (ESC + Key). Cursor keys can save switches and inputs, and
allow operator control of the circuit program. Cursor key inputs from the LOGO! TDE are
identical to cursor key inputs from the LOGO! Base Module.
LOGO! TDE function keys

The LOGO! TDE has four function keys, F1, F2, F3, and F4, which you can use in your
circuit program. You program these keys in the same way as other inputs. Like the cursor
keys, you can press these keys when LOGO! is in RUN mode to affect the behavior of the
circuit program, and to save switches and inputs.
Levels
Voltage levels are designated hi and lo. A constant "1" = hi or "0" = lo status at the block can
be set by means of a permanent voltage level or constant value hi or lo.
Open connectors
LOGO! uses the letter x to indicate unused block connectors.
Network inputs/outputs (available only if configured from LOGO!Soft Comfort)

You can configure the following network inputs/outputs only from LOGO!Soft Comfort. If the
circuit program in LOGO! contains a network digital/analog I/O, you can not edit any of the
rest of the circuit program except for the Par parameter. To edit the rest of the program, you
must upload the program to LOGO!Soft Comfort and then edit from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
1) Network digital inputs

The letters NI identify a network digital input. There are 64 digital network digital inputs NI1
to NI64 available for configuration in the circuit program from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
2) Network analog inputs

The letters NAI identify a network analog input. There are 32 network analog inputs NAI1 to
NAI32 available for configuration in the circuit program from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 123
LOGO! functions
4.2 Basic functions list - GF
3) Network digital outputs

The letters NQ identify a network digital output . There are 64 network digital outputs NQ1 to
NQ64 available for configuration in the circuit program from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
4) Network analog outputs

The letters NAQ identify a network analog output. There are 16 network analog outputs
NAQ1 to NAQ16 available for configuration in the circuit program from LOGO!Soft Comfort.

Basic functions represent simple logical elements of Boolean algebra.
You can invert the inputs of individual basic functions, that is, the circuit program inverts a
logical "1" at a relevant input to a logical "0"; if "0" is the value at the input, the program sets
a logical "1". See the programming example at Circuit program input (Page 72).
The GF list contains the basic function blocks you can use for your circuit program. The
following basic functions are available:
View in the circuit diagram View in LOGO! Name of the basic function
AND (Page 125)
AND with edge evaluation

(Page 126)
NAND (Page 127)

(not AND)
NAND with edge evaluation

(Page 127)
LOGO!
124 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
View in the circuit diagram View in LOGO! Name of the basic function
OR (Page 128)
NOR (Page 129)

(not OR)
XOR (Page 130)

(exclusive OR)
NOT (Page 130)

(negation, inverter)
4.2.1 AND
The output of the AND is only 1 if all inputs are 1, that is, all contacts are closed.
At an unused block input (x): x = 1.
AND function logic table
1 2 3 4 Q
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 1 0
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 125
LOGO! functions
1 2 3 4 Q
0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0
0 1 1 1 0
1 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 0
1 1 0 0 0
1 1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
4.2.2 AND with edge evaluation
The output of an edge-triggered AND is only 1 if all inputs are 1 and if at least one input was
low in the previous cycle.
Timing diagram for the AND with edge evaluation
LOGO!
126 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.2.3 NAND (not AND)
The output of the NAND is only 0 if the status at all inputs is 1, that is, the contacts are
closed.
NAND function logic table
1 2 3 4 Q
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 1
0 1 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 1
1 0 1 0 1
1 0 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1 1
1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 0
4.2.4 NAND with edge evaluation
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 127
LOGO! functions
The output status of the NAND with edge evaluation is only 1 if at least one input is 0 and if
all inputs were 1 in the previous cycle.
Timing diagram for the NAND with edge evaluation
4.2.5 OR
The output status of the OR element is only 1 if at least one input is 1, that is, at least one of
the contacts is closed.
OR function logic table
1 2 3 4 Q
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 1
0 1 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 1
1 0 1 0 1
LOGO!
128 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
1 2 3 4 Q
1 0 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1 1
1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1
4.2.6 NOR (not OR)
The output status of the NOR is only 1 if all inputs are 0, that is, off. The NOR output is set to
0 when one of the inputs is on (logical 1 status).
NOR function logic table
1 2 3 4 Q
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0
0 1 1 1 0
1 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 0
1 1 0 0 0
1 1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 0
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 129
LOGO! functions
4.2.7 XOR (exclusive OR)
The output status of the XOR is 1 if the inputs are not equivalent.
XOR function logic table
1 2 Q
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
4.2.8 NOT (Negation, Inverter)
The output status is 1 if the input is 0. The NOT block inverts the input status.
An advantage of the NOT block, for example, is that you do not have to use break contacts.
You simply use a make contact and the NOT block to convert these into a break contact.
NOT function logic table
1 Q
0 1
1 0
LOGO!
130 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.3 Special functions

Because of their different input designation, you can see right away that there is a difference
between the special functions and basic functions. Special functions (SFs) contain timer
functions, retentive functions and various parameter assignment options, which allow you to
adapt the circuit program to suit your own requirements.
This section provides you with a brief overview of input designations and with some
particular background information on SFs (Page 136).
4.3.1 Designation of the inputs
Logical inputs
The following connectors enable you to create a logical link to other blocks or to the inputs of
the LOGO! unit:
● S (Set):
A signal at input S sets the output to logical "1".
● R (Reset):
The reset input R takes priority over all other inputs and resets the outputs.
● Trg (Trigger):
This input triggers the start of a function.
● Cnt (Count):
This input counts pulses.
● Fre (Frequency):
LOGO! applies frequency signals to be evaluated to this input.
● Dir (Direction):
This input determines the direction, + or -.
● En (Enable):
This input enables a block function. When this input is "0", the block ignores all other
signals.
● Inv (Invert):
A signal at this input inverts the output signal of the block.
● Ral (Reset all):
A signal at this input resets all internal values.
● Lap (for the stopwatch function)
A signal at this input pauses the stopwatch.
Note
Unused logical inputs of special functions default to logical "0".
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 131
LOGO! functions
Connector X at SF inputs
The connector "x" input for any SF input is low. That is, the input carries a "lo" signal.
Parameter inputs
At some of the inputs you do not apply any signals. You configure the relevant block values
instead. Examples:
● Par (Parameter):
You do no connect the Par parameter. Instead, you set the relevant blcok parameters
(times, on/off thresholds etc.).
● Priority:
This is an open input. Here, you define priorities and specify whether a message is to be
acknowledged in RUN.
4.3.2 Time response
Parameter T
You can configure a time value T for some of the SF blocks. When you preset this time, note
that your input values are based on the timebase set:
Timebase __:__
s (seconds) seconds : 1/100 seconds
m (minutes) minutes : seconds
h (hours) hours : minutes
The LOGO! 0BA8-specific stopwatch (Page 176) function provides an additional timebase -
10 ms.
Accuracy of T
Because of slight tolerances in the characteristics of electronic components, the set time T
can deviate. You can find a detailed description of such deviations in the "On-delay" topic
(Page 141).
LOGO!
132 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Accuracy of the timer (weekly/yearly timer)

To prevent timing inaccuracy of the real-time clock in C versions (LOGO! devices with an
integrated real-time clock) caused by this deviation, LOGO! continuously compares the timer
value to a high-precision timebase and makes continual corrections. The resultant maximum
timing inaccuracy is ±2 s/day.
4.3.3 Backup of the real-time clock

Because LOGO! backs up the internal real-time clock, it continues operation after a power
failure. The surrounding temperature influences the backup time. At a surrounding
temperature of 25°C, the typical backup time of a LOGO! 0BA8 is 20 days.
If there is a power outage of a LOGO! for more than 20 days, on restarting, the internal clock
is back in the status that it was in before the power outage.
4.3.4 Retentivity
You can set the switching states, counter and time values of many SF blocks (Page 136) to
be retentive. This means that LOGO! retains current data values after a power failure, and
that the block resumes operation at the break point. The timer is not reset, but resumes
operation until the time-to-go has expired.
To enable this response, however, the relevant functions must be set retentive. Two options
are available:
R: The data is retentive.
/: Current data is not retentive (default). See the section in topic "Second circuit program
(Page 85)" on enabling and disabling retentivity.
The hours counter, weekly timer, yearly timer and PI controller are always retentive.
4.3.5 Parameter protection

In the parameter protection settings, you can determine whether or not you display and edit
the parameters in LOGO! parameter assignment mode. Two options are available:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 133
LOGO! functions
+: The parameter attribute permits read/write access in parameter assignment mode

(default).
-: The parameter settings are read–/write–protected in parameter assignment mode, and you
can only edit them in programming mode. See the parameter protection mode example in
the Second circuit program (Page 85).
Note
Parameter protection covers only the "Set Parameter" window. If you embed variables of
protected special functions in a message text, the variables are still editable from the
message text. To protect these variables, you must also activate the protection of the
message text.
4.3.6 Calculating the gain and offset of analog values

A sensor is connected to the analog input and converts a process variable into an electrical
signal. This value of signal lies within the typical range of this sensor.
LOGO! always converts the electrical signals at the analog input into digital values from 0 to
1000.
LOGO! internally transforms a voltage of 0 V to 10 V at input AI to a range of values from 0
to 1000. LOGO! interprets an input voltage exceeding 10 V as internal value 1000.
Because you cannot always process the range of values from 0 to 1000 as predetermined by
LOGO!, you can multiply the digital values by a gain factor and then shift the zero of the
range of values (offset). This allows you to output an analog value to the LOGO! onboard
display that is proportional to the actual process variable.
Parameter Minimum Maximum

Input voltage (in V) 0 ≥ 10
Internal value 0 1000
Gain -10.00 +10.00
Offset -10000 +10000
Mathematical rule
Actual value Ax =
(internal value at input Ax • gain) + offset
Gain and offset calculation

LOGO! calculates the gain and offset based on the relevant high and low values of the
function.
Example 1:
The available thermocouples have the following technical data: -30 °C to +70 °C, 0 to 10
VDC (that is, 0 to 1000 in LOGO!).
LOGO!
134 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Actual value = (internal value • gain) + offset, thus

-30 = (0 • A) + B, that is, offset B = -30
+70 = (1000 • A) -30, that is, gain A = 0.1
Example 2:
A pressure sensor converts a pressure of 1000 mbar into a voltage of 0 V, and a pressure of
5000 mbar into a voltage of 10 V.
Actual value = (internal value • gain) + offset, thus
1000 = (0 • A) + B, that is, offset B = 1000
5000 = (1000 • A) +1000, that is, gain A = 4
Example of analog values
Process variable Voltage (V) Internal value Gain Offset Value shown (Ax)
-30 °C 0 0 0.1 -30 -30
0 °C 3 300 0.1 -30 0
+70 °C 10 1000 0.1 -30 70
1000 mbar 0 0 4 1000 1000
3700 mbar 6.75 675 4 1000 3700
5000 mbar 10 1000 4 1000 5000
0 0 0.01 0 0
5 500 0.01 0 5
10 1000 0.01 0 10
0 0 1 0 0
5 500 1 0 500
10 1000 1 0 1000
0 0 10 0 0
5 500 10 0 5000
10 1000 10 0 10000
0 0 0.01 5 5
5 500 0.01 5 10
10 1000 0.01 5 15
0 0 1 500 500
5 500 1 500 1000
10 1000 1 500 1500
0 0 1 -200 -200
5 500 1 -200 300
10 1000 1 -200 800
0 0 10 -10000 -10000
10 1000 10 -10000 0
0.02 2 0.01 0 0
0.02 2 0.1 0 0
0.02 2 1 0 2
0.02 2 10 0 20
For further information on a sample application, refer to the "Analog comparator (Page 193)"
topic.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 135
LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
For further information on analog inputs, refer to the Constants and connectors (Page 119)
topic.

When you create your circuit program in LOGO!, you find the special function blocks in the
SF list.
You can invert the inputs of SFs individually, that is, the circuit program converts a logical "1"
at the input into a logical "0"; a logical "0" it converts into a logical "1". See the programming
example in topic "Circuit program input (Page 72)".
LOGO!
136 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
The table also specifies whether the relevant function can be set retentive (Rem). The
following SFs are available:
View in LOGO! Name of the special function Rem

Timers
On-delay (Page 141) REM
Off-delay (Page 145) REM
On-/off-delay (Page 147) REM
Retentive on-delay (Page 149) REM
Wiping relay (pulse output) (Page 151) REM
Edge-triggered wiping relay (Page 153) REM
Asynchronous pulse generator (Page 155) REM
Random generator (Page 157)
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 137
LOGO! functions

Stairway lighting switch (Page 159) REM
Multiple function switch (Page 161) REM
Weekly timer (Page 164)
Yearly timer (Page 167)
Astronomical clock (Page 173)
Stopwatch (Page 176)
Counter
Up/down counter (Page 178) REM
Hours counter (Page 181) REM
LOGO!
138 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions

Threshold trigger (Page 185)
Analog
Analog threshold trigger (Page 188)
Analog differential trigger (Page 191)
Analog comparator (Page 193)
Analog watchdog (Page 197)
Analog amplifier (Page 200)
Analog multiplexer (Page 218)
Pulse width modulator (PWM) (Page 229)
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 139
LOGO! functions

Mathematic instruction (Page 232)
Analog ramp (Page 221)
PI controller (Page 225) REM
Analog filter (Page 237)
Max/Min (Page 239) REM
Average value (Page 243) REM
Miscellaneous
Latching relay (Page 202) REM
Pulse relay (Page 203) REM
LOGO!
140 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions

Message texts (Page 204)
Softkey (Page 214) REM
Shift register (Page 216) REM
Mathematic instruction error detection

(Page 235)
4.4.1 On-delay
Short description
The output is only set after a configurable on-delay time expires.
Symbol in LOGO! Wiring Description

Input Trg A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the on-delay
timer.
Parameter T represents the time after which the output is on (0
to 1 transition of the output signal).
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
R = the status is retentive.
Output Q Q is on when the set time T expires, provided Trg is
still set.
Parameter T
Note the defaults for parameter T in topic Time response (Page 132).
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 141
LOGO! functions
The actual value of another already-configured functions can provide the time for parameter
T. You can use the actual values of the following functions for the value of T:
● Analog comparator (Page 193)(actual value Ax - Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 188)(actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 200)(actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 218)(actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 221)(actual value AQ)
● Mathematic instruction (Page 232) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 225)(actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 178)(actual value Cnt)
● Analog filter (Page 237) (actual value AQ)
● Average value (Page 243) (actual value AQ)
● Max/Min (Page 239) (actual value AQ)
● On-delay (current time Ta)
● Off-delay (Page 145)(current time Ta)
● On-/off-delay (Page 147)(current time Ta)
● Retentive on-delay (Page 149)(current time Ta)
● Wiping relay (pulse output) (Page 151)(current time Ta)
● Edge-triggered wiping relay (Page 153)(current time Ta)
● Asynchronous pulse generator (Page 155)(current time Ta)
● Stairway lighting switch (Page 159)(current time Ta)
● Multiple function switch (Page 161)(current time Ta)
● Stopwatch (Page 176)(actual value AQ)
● Threshold trigger (Page 185) (actual value Fre)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable.
Valid ranges of the timebase, if T = parameter

Note the following characteristics of timebase values.
Timebase max. value min. resolution Accuracy

s (seconds) 99:99 10 ms + 10 ms
m (minutes) 99:59 1s +1s
h (hours) 99:59 1 min + 1 min
The parameter T initially appears as follows in programming mode, for example:
LOGO!
142 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Valid ranges of the timebase

If an already-programmed function provides the value of T, the valid ranges of the timebase
are as follows:
Timebase max. value Meaning Accuracy

ms 99990 Number of ms + 10 ms
s 5999 Number of s +1s
m 5999 Number of min + 1 min
The LOGO! display appears as follows in programming mode, if you have, for example, set
the actual value of B6 in seconds to parameter T of B12:
If the referenced block (B6, in the example) returns a value that lies out of the valid range,
LOGO! rounds the value up or down to the next valid value.
Parameter preset = Actual value of an already-programmed function

To include the actual value of an already-programmed function for parameter T, follow these
steps:
1. Press to move the cursor to the equal sign of parameter T.
2. Press to change the equal sign into an arrow. LOGO! displays the last referenced
block if it exists.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 143
LOGO! functions
3. Press to move the cursor to the "B" of the shown block, and then press to select the
required block number.
4. Press to move the cursor to the block's timebase and press to select the required
timebase.
The view in parameter assignment mode appears as follows, for example:
Timing diagram
Functional description
A 0 to 1 transition triggers the time Ta at input Trg (Ta is the current LOGO! time).
If the status of input Trg is 1 at least for the duration of the configured time T, LOGO! sets
the output to 1 on expiration of this time (the output follows the input with on-delay).
LOGO! resets the time when the status at input Trg returns to 0 before the time T expires.
LOGO! resets the output to 0 when the signal at input Trg is 0.
If the block is retentive, LOGO! resets output Q and the expired time to the values before a
power failure; if the block is not retentive, LOGO! resets output Q and the expired time to
defaults after a power failure.
LOGO!
144 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.2 Off-delay
Short description
When an on-delay (Page 141) is set, the output is reset when the configured time has
expired.

Input Trg The off-delay timer starts with a negative edge (1 to 0
transition) at input Trg (Trigger)
Input R A signal at input R resets the on-delay time and the
output.
Parameter The output switches off (transitions from1 to 0) when
the delay time T expires.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q A signal at input Trg sets Q. Q holds this state until T
expires.
Parameter T
Note the parameter T defaults specified in topic Time response (Page 132).
The actual value of another already-configured functions can provide the time for parameter
T. You can use the actual value of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 193) (actual value Ax - Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 188) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 200) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 218) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 221) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 225) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 178) (actual value Cnt)
● On-delay (Page 141) (current time Ta)
● Off-delay (current time Ta)
● On-/off-delay (Page 147) (current time Ta)
● Retentive on-delay (Page 149) (current time Ta)
● Wiping relay (pulse output) (Page 151) (current time Ta)
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 145
LOGO! functions
● Edge-triggered wiping relay (Page 153) (current time Ta)

● Asynchronous pulse generator (Page 155) (current time Ta)
● Stairway lighting switch (Page 159) (current time Ta)
● Multiple function switch (Page 161) (current time Ta)
● Stopwatch (Page 176) (actual value AQ)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable. For
information on valid timebase ranges and parameter preset, refer to Section "On-delay
(Page 141)".
Timing diagram
LOGO! sets Output Q to hi immediately when the input Trg changes to hi.
LOGO! retriggers the actual time Ta at the 1 to 0 transition of Trg. The output remains set.
LOGO! resets Output Q to 0 with off-delay when Ta reaches the value configured at T (Ta=T).
LOGO! retriggers he time Ta with a one-shot at input Trg.
You can set input R (Reset) to reset the time Ta and the output before Ta expires.
LOGO!
146 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.3 On-/off-delay
Short description
The on-/off-delay function sets the output after the set on-delay time has expired, and resets
it upon expiration of the off-delay time.

Input Trg A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input Trg (Trig-
ger) triggers the on-delay time TH.
A negative edge (1 to 0 transition) at input Trg (Trig-
ger) triggers the off-delay time TL.
Parameter TH is the time after which the output is set hi (output
signal transition 0 to 1).
TL is the time after which the output is reset ( output
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
Output Q LOGO! sets Q when the configured time TH expires
and Trg is still set. LOGO! resets Q when TL expires,
if the trigger Trg has not been set.
Parameters TH and TL
Note the preset values for the parameters TH and TL in topic Time response (Page 132).
The actual value of another, already-configured function can provide the on-delay and off-
delay times for parameters TH and TL . You can use the actual values of the following
functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 193)(actual value Ax - Ay)
● On-delay (Page 141)(current time Ta)
● On-/off-delay (current time Ta)
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 147
LOGO! functions

information on valid timebase ranges and parameter preset, refer to Section "On-delay
(Page 141)".
Timing diagram
The time TH is triggered with a 0 to 1 transition at input Trg.
If the status at input Trg is 1 at least for the duration of the time TH, LOGO! sets the output to
1 on expiration of the time TH (the output follows the input with on-delay).
LOGO! resets the time when LOGO! resets the signal at input Trg to 0 before the time TH
expires.
A 1 to 0 transition at input Trg triggers the time TL.
If the status at input Trg is 0 at least for the duration of the signal TL, LOGO! sets the output
to 0 on expiration of the time TL (the output follows the input with off-delay).
LOGO! resets the time when the signal at input Trg changes to 1 again before the time TL
expires.
LOGO!
148 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.4 Retentive on-delay
Short description
A one-shot at the input triggers a configurable on-delay time. The output is set when this
time has expired.

Input Trg A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the on-delay
timer.
Input R A signal at input R resets the on-delay time and the
output.
Parameter T represents the on-delay time for the output (output
status transition 0 to 1).
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
Output Q LOGO! sets output Q after the time T expires.
Parameter T
Note the defaults specified in topic Time response (Page 132).
The actual value of another already-programmed function can provide the time for parameter
T. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 193)(actual value Ax – Ay)
● Retentive on-delay (current time Ta)
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 149
LOGO! functions

information on valid ranges and parameter defaults, refer to Section "On-delay (Page 141)".
Timing diagram
The 0 to 1 signal transition at input Trg triggers the current time Ta. LOGO! sets output Q
when Ta = T. A further signal at input Trg does not influence the time Ta.
LOGO! resets the output and the time Ta with the next 1 signal at input R.
LOGO!
150 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.5 Wiping relay (pulse output)
Short description
An input signal generates a signal with a configurable period at the output.

Input Trg A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the time for the
wiping relay function.
Parameter The output is switched off after the time T has expired
(output signal transition 1 to 0).
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
Output Q A signal at input Trg sets Q. If the input signal = 1,
output Q remains set for the time Ta.
Parameter T
Note the information on parameter T in topic Time response (Page 132).
The actual value of another already-programmed function can provide the time for parameter
T. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 193)(actual value Ax – Ay)
● Wiping relay (pulse output) (current time Ta)
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 151
LOGO! functions

information on valid ranges and parameter defaults, refer to Section "On-delay (Page 141)".
Timing diagram
A 0 to 1 transition at input Trg sets the output, and triggers a time Ta during which the output
remains set.
LOGO! resets output Q to lo (pulse output) when Ta reaches the value preset at T (Ta = T).
LOGO! sets the output immediately if there is a 1 to 0 transition at input Trg before the
specified time expires.
LOGO!
152 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.6 Edge-triggered wiping relay
Short description
An input pulse generates a preset number of output pulses with a defined pulse/pause ratio
(retriggerable), after a configured delay time has expired.

Input Trg A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the times for
the edge triggered wiping relay.
Input R A signal at input R resets the current time (Ta) and the
output.
Parameter The interpulse width TL and the pulse width TH are
configurable.
N determines the number of pulse/pause cycles
TL/TH:
Range of values: 1...9
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
Output Q Q is set after TL expires, and reset after TH expires.
Note the information on parameter T in topic Time response (Page 132).
The actual value of another already-programmed function can provide the pulse width TH
and the interpulse width TL. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 193) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Off-delay (Page 145) (current time Ta)
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 153
LOGO! functions
● Wiping relay(pulse output) (Page 151) (current time Ta)

● Edge triggered wiping relay (current time Ta)
● Stairway light switch (Page 159) (current time Ta)
information on valid ranges and parameter defaults, refer to the On-delay (Page 141) topic.
Timing diagram A
Timing diagram B
A 0 to 1 transition at input Trg triggers the time TL (Time Low). After the time TL has expired,
output Q is set for the duration of TH (Time High).
If there is a further 0 to 1 transition (retriggering pulse) at input Trg before the preset time (TL
+ TH) has expired, Ta is reset and the pulse/pause cycle is restarted.
LOGO!
154 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Setting the Par parameter

View in programming mode (example):
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
4.4.7 Asynchronous pulse generator
Short description
You can asynchronously output pulses with this function.

Input En You can use input EN to set and reset the asynchro-
nous pulse generator.
Input Inv You can use input Inv to invert the output signal of the
active asynchronous pulse generator.
Parameter You can configure the pulse width TH and the inter-
pulse width TL.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
Output Q The pulse and pause values cyclically set and reset
Q.
Note the information on parameter T in topic Time response (Page 132)
The actual value of another already-programmed function can provide the pulse width TH
and the interpulse width TL. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 155
LOGO! functions

● Edge triggered wiping relay (Page 153) (current time Ta)
● Aysnchronous pulse generator (current time Ta)
Timing diagram
You can configure the pulse/interpulse width at the TH (Time High) and TL (Time Low)
parameters.
Input Inv can be used to invert the output signal, provided the block is enabled with a signal
at input EN.
LOGO!
156 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.8 Random generator
Short description
The random generator function sets an output randomly within a configured time.

Input En A positive edge ( 0 to 1 transition) at input En (Ena-
ble) triggers the on-delay time of the random genera-
tor.
A negative edge ( 1 to 0 transition) at input En (Ena-
ble) triggers the off-delay time of the random genera-
tor.
Parameter LOGO! sets the on-delay at random to a value be-
tween 0 s and TH.
The off-delay is set at random to a value between 0 s
and TL.
Output Q LOGO! sets output Q when the on-delay expires and
if En is still set. LOGO! resets Q when the off-delay
expires, provided LOGO! has not set En again
meanwhile.
Parameter TH and TL
Note the defaults of the TH and TL parameters listed in topic Time response (Page 132).
The actual value of another already-programmed function can provide the on-delay time TH
and the off-delay time TL. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 157
LOGO! functions

Timing diagram
The 0 to 1 transition at input En triggers a random on-delay time between 0 s and TH. The
output is set when the on-delay time expires and if the signal at input En remains hi at least
for the duration of this time.
The time is reset if input En is reset before the on-delay time has expired.
A 1 to 0 transition at input EN triggers a random off-delay time between 0 s and TL.
LOGO! resets the output after the off-delay time expires, provided input En remains lo at
least for the duration of this time.
LOGO! resets the time if the signal at input En changes to 1 again before the off-delay time
expires.
LOGO!
158 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.9 Stairway lighting switch
Short description
An input edge triggers a configurable and retriggerable time. LOGO! resets the output after
this time expires. LOGO! can optionally output a warning signal to warn of the impending
time expiration.

Input Trg A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the off-delay
time for the stairway lighting switch.
Parameter T represents the off-delay time of the output (output
T! determines the triggering time for the pre-warning.
T!L determines the length of the pre-warning signal.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
Output Q LOGO! resets Q after the time T expires. LOGO!
outputs a warning signal before this time expires.
Parameter T, T! and T!L

Note the defaults of the T parameters listed in topic Time response (Page 132).
The actual value of another already-programmed function can provide the off-delay time T,
the pre-warning time T! and the pre-warning period T!L. You can use the actual values of the
following functions:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 159
LOGO! functions

● Stairway lightswitch (current time Ta)
Timing diagram
A 0 to 1 signal transition at input Trg sets output Q. The next 1 to 0 transition at Trg
retriggers the current time Ta, and output Q remains set.
LOGO! resets output Q when Ta = T. You can output a warning signal before the off-delay
time (T - T!) expires to reset Q for the time of the pre-warning period T!L.
A further one-shot at input Trg during Ta retriggers the time Ta .

Note the defaults specified in topic Time response (Page 132).
Note
All times must have the same timebase.
LOGO!
160 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.10 Multiple function switch
Short description
The multiple function switch provides two different functions:
● Pulse switch with off-delay
● Switch (permanent lighting)

Input Trg A signal at input Trg (Trigger) sets output Q (perma-
nent light) or resets Q with an off-delay. When active,
output Q can be reset with a signal at input Trg.
Input R A signal at input R resets the current time Ta and
resets the output.
Parameter T represents the off-delay time. LOGO! resets the
output (1 to 0 transition) when time T expires.
TL represents the time during which the output must
be set to enable the permanent light function.
T! represents the on-delay for the prewarning time.
T!L represents the length of the prewarning time peri-
od.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
Output Q A signal at Trg switches on output Q. Depending on
the length of the input at Trg, the output is off again or
on permanently, or it is reset with a further signal at
Trg.
Parameters T, TL,T! and T!L

LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 161
LOGO! functions
The actual value of another already-programmed function can provide the off-delay time T,
the permanent light time TL, the on-delay prewarning time T! and the prewarning time period
T!L. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Multiple function switch (current time Ta)
Timing diagram
LOGO!
162 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
A 0 to 1 transition at input Trg sets output Q.
If output Q = 0, and input Trg is set hi at least for the duration of TL, LOGO! enables the
permanent lighting function and sets output Q accordingly.
LOGO! triggers the off-delay T when input Trg returns to 0 before TL has expired.
Output Q is reset when Ta = T.
You can output an off-warning signal prior to the expiration of the off-delay time (T - T!) that
resets Q for the duration of the prewarning time period T!L. A subsequent signal at Trg
always resets T and the output Q.

Note the defaults specified in the topic "Time response (Page 132)".
Note
T, T! and T!L must all have the same timebase.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 163
LOGO! functions
4.4.11 Weekly timer
Short description
The weekly timer controls an output by means of a configurable on/off date. The function
supports any combination of weekdays. You select the active weekdays by hiding the
inactive days.
Note
Because LOGO! 24/24o does not have a real-time clock, the weekly timer function is not
available.

Cam parameters At the Cam parameters, you set the on- and off-times of the
1, 2 and 3 weekly timer for each Cam switch. Here you also configure
the days and the time-of-day.
You can also specify whether the timer pulses on for one
cycle when activated and then reset. The pulse setting ap-
plies to all three cams.
Output Q LOGO! sets Q when actuating the configured cam.
Timing diagram (three examples)
Each weekly timer has three cams for you to configure a time hysteresis. You specify the on-
and off-times at the Cam parameters. The weekly timer sets the output at a certain on-time;
if you have not set it, the weekly timer resets the output at a certain off-time if you configure
an off-time, or at the end of the cycle if you specify a pulse output.
You will cause a conflict if you set overlapping on- and off-times; the earliest on- and off-
times take priority. Here is an example:
Cam On-time Off-time

1 1:00h 2:00h
LOGO!
164 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
2 1:10h 1:50h
3 1:20h 1:40h
In this example, the work time is 1:00h to 1:40h.

The status of all three cams determines the switching state of the weekly timer.
Parameter assignment screen form

View of the parameter assignment screen form, for example for Cam1 and the Pulse setting:
Days of the week

The prefix "D=" (Day) has the following meaning:
● M: Monday
● T: Tuesday
● W: Wednesday
● T: Thursday
● F: Friday
● S: Saturday
● S: Sunday
Uppercase letters indicate a specific day of the week. A "-" indicates no selection for the day
of the week.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 165
LOGO! functions
On-/Off-times
Any time between 00:00 h and 23:59 h is possible. You can also configure the on time to be
a pulse signal. The timer block will be activated at the specified time for one cycle and then
the output is reset.
- -:- - means: No on-/off-times set.
Setting the weekly timer

To set the on-/off-times:
1. Move the cursor to one of the Cam parameters of the timer (for example, No1).
2. Press OK. The cursor is positioned on the day of the week.
3. Press and to select one or several days of the week.
4. Press to move the cursor to the first position of the on-time.
5. Set the on-time.
Modify the value at the respective position, using the keys and . Move to the cursor
to the various positions, using the keys and . At the first position, you can only select
the value - -:- -
(- -:- - means: No on-/off-times set).
6. Press to move the cursor to the first position of the off-time.
7. Set the off-time (in same way as in Step 5).
To configure Cam2, press . The cursor is now positioned on the No2 parameter (Cam2)
and you can continue with Steps 1 to 8.
Note
For information on timer accuracy, refer to the technical data and to the topic "Time
response (Page 132)".
Weekly timer: Example

The output of the weekly timer switch is to be set daily from 06:30 h to 08:00 h. The output
should also be set every Tuesday from 03:10 h to 04:15 h, and on the weekends from 16:30
h to 23:10 h.
This requires three cams.
Here are the parameter assignment screen forms of the cams No 1, 2 and 3, based on the
timing diagram shown earlier.
● Cam No1 must set the output of the weekly timer daily from 06:30 h to 08:00 h.
● Cam No2 must set the output of the weekly timer every Tuesday from 03:10 h to 04:15 h.
● Cam No3 must set the output of the weekly timer switch every Saturday and Sunday from
16:30 h to 23:10 h.
LOGO!
166 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Views in LOGO!:
Result
4.4.12 Yearly timer
Short description
The output is controlled by means of a configurable on/off date. You can configure the timer
to activate on a yearly, monthly, or user-defined time basis. With any mode, you can also
configure the timer to pulse the output during the defined time period. The time period is
configurable within the date range of January 1, 2000 to December 31, 2099.
Note
Because LOGO! 24/24o does not have a real-time clock, the yearly timer is not available for
both versions.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 167
LOGO! functions

Cam parameter At the Cam parameter, you configure the timer mode,
the on-/off-times for the timer, and whether the output
is a pulse output.
Output Q LOGO! sets Q when the configured cam is on.
Timing diagrams
Example 1: Yearly mode on, Monthly mode off, Pulse Off, On Time = 2000-06-01, Off Time =
2099-08-31: every year on June 1 the timer output switches on and remains on until August
31.
Example 2: Yearly mode on, Monthly mode off, Pulse on, On Time = 2000-03-15, Off Time =
2099-**-**: every year on March 15, the timer switches on for one cycle.
Example 3: Yearly mode on, Monthly mode off, Pulse off, On Time = 2008-06-01, Off Time =
2010-08-31: on June 1 of 2008, 2009, and 2010 the timer output switches on and remains on
until August 31.
LOGO!
168 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Example 4: Yearly mode on, Monthly mode off, Pulse on, On Time = 2008-03-15, Off Time =
2010-**-**: on March 15 of 2008, 2009, and 2010, the timer output switches on for one cycle.
Example 5: Yearly mode off, Monthly mode off, Pulse off, On Time = 2008-06-01, Off Time =
2010-08-31: on June 1, 2008 the timer output switches on and remains on until August 31,
2010.
Example 6: Yearly mode off, Monthly mode off, Pulse selected, On Time = 2008-03-15, Off
Time = ****-**-**: on March 15, 2008 the timer output switches on for one cycle. Because the
timer does not have a monthly action or yearly action, the timer output pulses only one time
at the specified On Time.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 169
LOGO! functions
Example 7: Yearly mode on, Monthly mode off, Pulse off, On Time = 2008-12-15, Off Time =
2010-01-07: on December 15 of 2008 and 2009, the timer output switches on and remains
on until January 7 of the following year. When the timer output turns off on January 7, 2010 it
does NOT turn on again the following December 15.
Example 8: Yearly mode on, Monthly mode on, On Time = 2008-**-01, Off Time = 2010-**-
05: starting in 2008, on the first day of each month the timer output switches on and switches
off on the fifth day of the month. The timer continues in this pattern through the last month of
2010.
The yearly timer sets and resets the output at specific on and off dates. Sets and resets are
executed at 00:00. If your application requires a different time, use a weekly timer together
with a yearly timer in your circuit program.
LOGO!
170 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
The on time specifies when the timer is activated. The off time specifies when the output is
reset again. For the on and off times, note the order of the fields: The first field defines the
year, the second the month and the third the day.
If you set the Monthly mode on, the timer output switches on each month at the specified day
of the on time and remains on until the specified day of the off time. The on time specifies
the initial year in which the timer is activated. The off time defines the last year in which the
timer turns off. The maximum year is 2099.
If you set the Yearly mode on, the timer output switches on each year at the specified month
and day of the on time and remains on until the specified month and day of the off time. The
on time specifies the initial year in which the timer is activated. The off time defines the last
year in which the timer turns off. The maximum year is 2099.
If you set Pulse output, the timer output switches on at the specified on time for one cycle
and then the timer output is reset. You can choose to pulse a timer on a monthly or yearly
basis, or just a single time.
If you set none of the Monthly, Yearly, or Pulse modes on, you can define a specific time
period with the on time and off time. It can span any time period that you choose.
For a process action that is to be switched on and off at multiple but irregular times during
the year, you can define multiple yearly timers with the outputs connected by an OR function
block.
Backup of the real-time clock

The internal real-time clock of LOGO! is buffered against power failure. The buffering time is
influenced by the surrounding temperature, and is typically 80 hours at a surrounding
temperature of 25°C.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 171
LOGO! functions
Sample configuration
The output of a LOGO! is to be set annually on March 1, reset on April 4, set again on July 7,
and reset again on November 19. You need to configure two yearly timers with
corresponding on-times, then logically link the outputs by means of an OR block.
Result
LOGO!
172 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.13 Astronomical clock
Short description
The astronomical clock function is used to set an output high when the current time of your
LOGO! Base Module is between the time of sunrise (TR) and the time of sunset (TS). LOGO!
automatically calculates these times based on the geographical location, the settings for
automatic summertime/wintertime conversion, and the current time of the module.

Parameter You specify the longitude, altitude, time zone, sunrise
time offset and sunset time offset:
Longitude:
Direction settings:
EAST or WEST
Range of values:
0 ° to 180 ° (degrees)
0 ' to 59 ' (minutes)
0 " to 59 " (seconds)
Latitude:
Direction settings:
NORTH or SOUTH
Range of values:
0 ° to 90 ° (degrees)
0 ' to 59 ' (minutes)
0 " to 59 "(seconds)
Zone:
Range of values:
-11 to 12
TR Offset (sunrise time offset):
Range of values:
-59 minutes to 59 minutes
TS Offset (sunset time offset):
Range of values:
-59 minutes to 59 minutes
Output Q LOGO! sets Q to "1" when the current time of your
LOGO! Base Module is between the sunrise time
(TR) and the sunset time (TS).
Note
From LOGO!Soft Comfort V8.0, you can choose from several pre-defined time zone
locations. If you select one of these locations, LOGO!Soft Comfort uses the latitude,
longitude, and the time zone of your selection. This location pre-configuration capability is
only possible from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 173
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram
The following illustration is an example of the timing diagram where Ta refers to the current
time of the LOGO! Base Module:
The function calculates the TR and TS values at the input and sets Q when Ta (Ta is the
current LOGO! Time) is between TR and TS; otherwise, the function resets Q.
If automatic summertime/wintertime conversion (see the topic Summertime/wintertime
conversion (Page 98) for details) is enabled, the function takes the configured time
difference into consideration when calculating the TR and TS values.

Press
Press
LOGO!
174 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Press
If automatic summertime/wintertime conversion is disabled, press and LOGO! shows the

following view in parameter assignment mode (example):
If automatic summertime/wintertime conversion is enabled and set to "EU" (for example),

press and LOGO! shows the following view in parameter assignment mode (example):
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 175
LOGO! functions
4.4.14 Stopwatch
Short description
The stopwatch function counts the elapsed time between a start stopwatch signal and a stop
stopwatch signal.

En A signal at input En begins counting elapsed time at
analog output AQ.
Lap A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input Lap pauses
the stopwatch.
A negative edge (1 to 0 transition) at input Lap re-
sumes the stopwatch.
R A signal at input R resets the elapsed time.
Parameter You can set a timebase TB for the stopwatch.
Possible timebase settings:
10 ms, s, m, and h
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive
Output AQ A signal at input Lap holds the value of AQ until Lap
is reset to 0. A signal at input R resets the value of
AQ to 0.
Parameters TB
You can set a timebase from the following timebase set:
● 10 ms (10 milliseconds)
● s (seconds)
● m (minutes)
● h (hours)
LOGO!
176 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram
En = 1 and Lap = 0: Using the selected timebase, the stopwatch outputs the current time
(CurT) to AQ.
En = 1 and Lap = 1: The stopwatch leaves AQ at its last value when Lap = 0. This value is
recorded as LapT for stopwatch pause time.
En = 0 and Lap = 1: The stopwatch pauses counting time. It outputs LapT to AQ.
En = 0 and Lap = 0: The stopwatch outputs the current time (CurT) to AQ.
A signal at R sets the AQ value to 0.
To change the timebase, press to move the cursor to "10ms". Press OK and now the
timebase can be selected. Press or to select another timebase. To confirm your
selection, press OK.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 177
LOGO! functions
4.4.15 Up/down counter
Short description
An input pulse increments or decrements an internal value, depending on the parameter
setting. The output is set or reset when a configured threshold is reached. The direction of
count can be changed with a signal at input Dir.

Input R A signal at input R resets the internal count value to
zero.
Input Cnt The function counts the 0 to 1 transitions at input Cnt.
1 to 0 transitions are not counted.
You can use the following as the input:
• inputs I3, I4, I5, and I6 for fast counting (only
LOGO! 12/24RCE/RCEo and LOGO!
24CE/24CEo): max. 5 kHz, if the fast input is di-
rectly connected to the up/down counter function
block
• any other input or circuit component for counting
low frequency signals (typically 4 Hz)
Input Dir You set the direction of count at input Dir:
Dir = 0: Count up
Dir = 1: Count down
Parameter On: on threshold
Range of values:
0...999999
Off: off threshold
Range of values:
0...999999
StartVal: initial value from which to begin counting
either down or up.
Retentivity for internal counter value Cnt:
/ = No retentivity
Output Q Q is set or reset, depending on the current value at
Cnt and the set thresholds.
Parameters On and Off

The actual value of another already-programmed function can provide the on threshold On
and the off threshold Off. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
LOGO!
178 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions

● Up/down counter (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number.
Timing diagram
The internal counter increments (Dir = 0) or decrements (Dir = 1) by one count with every
positive edge at input Cnt.
You can use input R to reset the internal count value to the start value. As long as R = 1, the
output is also 0 and the pulses at input Cnt are not counted.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure.
Q is set or reset depending on the current value at Cnt and the set thresholds. See the
calculation rule below.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 179
LOGO! functions
Calculation rule
● If the On threshold ≥ Off threshold, then:
Q = 1, if Cnt ≥ On
Q = 0, if Cnt < Off
● If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1, if On ≤ Cnt < Off.
Note
The system scans the counter limit value cyclically.
Thus, if the pulse frequency at the fast digital inputs I3, I4, I5 or I6 is faster than the cycle
time, the special function might not switch until after the specified limit value is exceeded.
Example: Up to 100 pulses per cycle can be counted; 900 pulses have been counted so
far. On = 950; Off = 10000. The output is set in the next cycle, after the value has
reached 1000. (The output would not be set at all if the value Off = 980).
If the referenced block (B021, in the example) returns a value that lies out of the valid range,
the value is rounded to the next valid value.
The view in parameter assignment mode (example):
LOGO!
180 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.16 Hours counter
Short description
A configured time is triggered with a signal at the monitoring input. The output is set when
this time has expired.

Input R A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input R resets
output Q and sets a configured value MI at the coun-
ter for the duration of the time-to-go (MN).
Input En En is the monitoring input. LOGO! scans the on-time
of this input.
Input Ral A positive edge at input Ral (Reset all) resets the
hours counter (OT) and the output, and sets the time-
to-go value (MN) to the maintenance interval MI:
• Output Q = 0
• Measured operating time OT = 0
• Time-to-go of the maintenance interval MN = MI.
Parameter MI: Maintenance interval to be preset in units of hours
and minutes
Range of values:
0000 h to 9999 h, 0 m to 59 m
OT: the accumulated total operating time (you can
specify an offset in hours and minute)
Range of values:
00000 h to 99999 h, 0 m to 59 m
Q → 0 occurs depending on the following conditions:
• When "R" is selected:
Q = 1, if MN = 0;
Q = 0, if R = 1 or Ral = 1
• When "R+En" is selected:
Q = 1, if MN = 0;
Q = 0, if R = 1 or Ral = 1 or En = 0.
Output Q The output is set when the time-to-go MN = 0 (see
timing diagram).
The output is reset under the following conditions:
• When "Q→0:R+En", if
R = 1 or Ral = 1 or En = 0
• When "Q→0:R", if R = 1 or Ral = 1.
Note
MI, MN and OT are always retentive.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 181
LOGO! functions
Parameter MI
The maintenance interval MI can be provided by the actual value of another already-
programmed function. The timebase of the referenced value is "h" (for hours) only. You can
use the actual values of the following functions:
● Stopwatch (Page 176) (current time Ta)
LOGO!
182 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram
The hours counter monitors input En. When En = 1, LOGO! computes the time expired and
the time-to-go MN. LOGO! shows these times in parameter assignment mode. Output Q is
set when the time-to-go MN = 0.
A signal at reset input R resets output Q and sets the preset value of MI at the counter for
the duration of MN. The hours counter OT is not affected.
With a signal at the reset input Ral, you reset output Q and set the preset value of MI at the
counter for the duration of MN. The hours counter OT is reset to zero.
Depending on your configuration of parameter Q, the output is either reset with a signal at
input R or Ral ("Q→0:R"), or when a reset signal is set hi, or the En signal is set lo
("Q→0:R+En").
Viewing the MI, MN and OT values

● LOGO! Basic: You can open the parameter assignment mode when the system is in RUN
to view the actual values of MI, MN and OT.
● LOGO! Pure: In LOGO!Soft Comfort, you can use the Online Test to read these values.
For further information, see chapter "LOGO! software (Page 291)".
● In LOGO!Soft Comfort you can get the hours counter via the "Tools -> Transfer: Hours
counter" menu command.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 183
LOGO! functions
Limit value of OT
The value of the operating hours in OT is retained when you reset the hours counter with a
signal at input R. The hours counter OT will be reset to zero with a transition from 0 to 1 at
Ral. It continues the count as long as En = 1, irrespective of the status at the reset input R.
The counter limit of OT is 99999 h. The hours counter stops when it reaches this value.
In programming mode, you can set the initial value of OT. MN is calculated according to the
following formula when reset input R is never enabled: MN = MI - (OT % MI). The % operator
provides an integer division remainder.
Example:
MI = 30h, OT = 100h
MN = 30 - (100 % 30)
MN = 30 -10
MN = 20h
In runtime mode, the value OT can not be preset. If the value for MI is changed, there would
be no calculation for the MN. MN would take on the value of MI.

View in programming mode:
MI is the configurable time interval. The permissible range of values is 0 to 9999 hours.
For information on how to assign the actual value of another already-programmed function to
a parameter, see the On-delay (Page 141) topic.
View in parameter assignment mode:
LOGO!
184 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.17 Threshold trigger
Short description
The output is set and reset with two configurable threshold triggers.

Input Fre The function counts the 0 to 1 transitions at input Fre.
1 to 0 transitions are not counted.
Use the following as the input:
• inputs I3, I4, I5, I6 for fast counting (only LOGO!
12/24RCE/RCEo and LOGO! 24CE/24CEo): max.
5 kHz, if the fast input is directly connected to the
threshold trigger function block
• any other input or circuit component for counting
low frequency signals (typically 4 Hz)
Parameter On: on threshold
Range of values:
0000...9999
Off: off threshold
Range of values:
0000...9999
G_T: time interval or gate time during which the input
pulses are measured
Range of values:
00:00 s...99:99 s
Output Q Q is set and reset at the thresholds.
Parameter G_T
The gate time G_T can be provided by the actual value of another already-programmed
function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 185
LOGO! functions

● Threshold trigger (actual value Fre)
Timing diagram
The threshold trigger measures the signals at input Fre. The pulses are recorded across a
configurable time G_T.
Output Q is set and reset in accordance with the set thresholds. See the calculation rule
below.
Calculation rule
● If the On threshold ≥ Off threshold, then Q = 1, if fa > On or Q = 0, if fa ≤ Off.
● If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1 if On ≤ fa < Off.
Note
The system scans the counter limit value once per interval G_T.
LOGO!
186 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Note
The "seconds" timebase is here set as permanent default.
When you preset a time G_T of 1 s, LOGO! returns the current frequency in parameter fa in
Hz.
Note
fa always represents the total pulses measured per time unit G_T.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 187
LOGO! functions
4.4.18 Analog threshold trigger
Short description
The output is set and reset at two configurable thresholds.

Input Ax Input Ax is one of the following analog signals:
• AI1 to AI8 (*)
• AM1 to AM64
• NAI1 to NAI32
• AQ1 to AQ8
• NAQ1 to NAQ16
• Block number of a function with analog output
Parameter A: gain
Range of values: -10.00 to 10.00
B: zero offset
Range of values: -10,000 to 10,000
On: on threshold
Off: off threshold
p: number of decimals
Range of values: 0, 1, 2, 3
Output Q Q is set or reset by the threshold triggers.
* AI1...AI8: 0...10 V corresponds with 0...1000 (internal value).
Gain and offset parameters

Please note the information on gain and offset parameters in topic "Calculating the gain and
offset of analog values (Page 134)".

The actual value of another already-programmed function can provide the On and Off
parameters. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
LOGO!
188 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions

● Analog threshold trigger (actual value Ax)
Parameter p (number of decimals)

Applies only to the display of On, Off and Ax values in a message text.
Does not apply to the comparison of On and Off values. (The compare function ignores the
decimal point.)
Timing diagram
The function fetches the analog signal at input Ax.
Ax is multiplied by the value of the A (gain) parameter, and the value at parameter B (offset)
is added to product, i.e. (Ax • gain) + offset = actual value of Ax.
Output Q is set or reset, depending on the set thresholds. See the calculation rule below.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 189
LOGO! functions
Calculation rule
● If the On threshold ≥ Off threshold, then Q = 1, if the actual value Ax > On or Q = 0, if the
actual value Ax ≤ Off.
● If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1 if On ≤ actual value Ax < Off.

The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application.
View in the message text (example):
LOGO!
190 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.19 Analog differential trigger
Short description
The output is set and reset depending on a configurable threshold and a differential value.

• AI1 to AI8 (*)
• AM1 to AM64
• NAI1 to NAI32
• AQ1 to AQ8
• NAQ1 to NAQ16
Parameter A: gain
B: zero offset
On: On/Off threshold
Δ: differential value for calculating the off parameter
p: Number of decimals
Output Q Q is set or reset, depending on the threshold and
difference values.

Please note the information on gain and offset parameters in topic "Calculating the gain and

Applies only to the display of On, Off and Ax values in a message text.
Timing diagram A: Function with negative difference Δ
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 191
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram B: Function with positive difference Δ
The function fetches the analog signal at input Ax.
Ax is multiplied by the value of the A (gain) parameter, and the value at parameter B (offset)
is added to product, i.e. (Ax • gain) + offset = actual value of Ax.
Output Q is set or reset, depending on the set (On) threshold and difference value (Δ). The
function automatically calculates the Off parameter: Off = On + Δ, whereby Δ may be
positive or negative. See the calculation rule below.
Calculation rule
● When you set a negative differential value Δ, the On threshold ≥ Off threshold, and Q =
1if the actual value Ax > On or Q = 0 if the actual value Ax ≤ Off.
See the timing diagram A.
● When you set a positive differential value Δ, the On threshold < the Off threshold, and Q
= 1, if On ≤ actual value Ax < Off.
See the timing diagram B.

LOGO!
192 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.20 Analog comparator
Short description
The output is set and reset depending on the difference Ax - Ay and on two configurable
thresholds.

Inputs Ax and Ay Inputs Ax and Ay are one of the following analog
signals:
• AI1 to AI8 (*)
• AM1 to AM64
• NAI1 to NAI32
• AQ1 to AQ8
• NAQ1 to NAQ16
Parameter A: gain
B: ero offset
On: on threshold
Off: off threshold
Output Q Q is set or reset, depending on the difference Ax - Ay
and the set thresholds..

For more information on the gain and offset parameters, refer to topic "Calculating the gain
and offset of analog values (Page 134)".

The actual value of another already-programmed function the on threshold On and the off
threshold Off. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 193
LOGO! functions

● Analog comparator (actual value Ax - Ay)

Applies only to Ax, Ay, On, Off and Δ values displayed in a message text.
Does not apply to the comparison of on and off values! (The compare function ignores the
decimal point.)
Timing diagram
LOGO!
194 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
The function fetches the analog values from the inputs Ax and Ay.
Ax and Ay are each multiplied by the value of the A (gain) parameter, and the value at
parameter B (offset) is then added to the relevant product, i.e.
(Ax • gain) + offset = actual value Ax or
(Ay • gain) + offset = actual value Ay.
The function forms the difference ("Δ") between the actual values Ax - Ay.
Output Q is set or reset, depending on difference of the actual values Ax - Ay and the set
thresholds. See the calculation rule below.
Calculation rule
● If the On threshold ≥ Off threshold, then Q = if (actual value Ax - actual value Ay) > On or
Q = 0 if (actual value Ax - actual value Ay) ≤ Off.
● If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1, if On ≤ (actual value Ax - actual value Ay)
< Off.

Example
In a heating control system, the supply Tv and return line temperatures Tr are to be
compared, for example with a sensor at AI2.
A control signal is to be triggered (for example "heater On") when the difference between the
supply and return line temperatures is greater than 15 °C. The control signal is reset when
the difference is less than 5 °C.
The process variable of the temperature is to be shown in parameter assignment mode.
The thermocouples available have the following technical data: -30 °C to +70 °C, 0 VDC to
10 VDC.
Application Internal mapping

-30 °C to 70 °C = 0 VDC to 10 VDC 0 to 1000
0 °C 300
→ Offset = -30
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 195
LOGO! functions
Application Internal mapping

Range of values: 1000
-30 °C to 70 °C = 100 → Gain = 100/1000 = 0.1
On threshold = 15 °C Threshold = 15
Off threshold = 5 °C Threshold = 5
See also topic "Calculating the gain and offset of analog values (Page 134) ".
Configuration (example):
View in the message text (example):
Reducing the input response of the analog comparator

You can selectively delay the output of an analog comparator by means of the "On-delay"
and "Off-delay" special functions. With on-delay, output Q is only set if the pulse width of the
triggering signal at input Trg (=analog comparator output) is longer than the on-delay time.
Using this method, you will obtain a virtual hysteresis and reduce the input response to short
signals.
Function block diagram
LOGO!
196 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.21 Analog watchdog
Short description
This special function saves the process variable of an analog input to memory, and sets the
output when the output variable exceeds or drops below this stored value plus a configurable
offset.

Input En A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input En saves
the analog value at input Ax ("Aen") to memory and
starts monitoring of the analog range Aen - Δ 2 to
Aen+ Δ 1
• AI1 to AI8 (*)
• AM1 to AM64
• NAI1 to NAI32
• AQ1 to AQ8
• NAQ1 to NAQ16
Parameter A: gain
B: zero offset
Δ1: difference value above Aen:
on/off threshold
Range of values: 0 to 20,000
Δ2: difference value below Aen:
on/off threshold
Range of values: 0 to 20,000
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
R = the status is retentive in memory
Output Q Q is set/reset, depending on the stored analog value
and the offset.

For more information on gain and offset parameters, refer to topic "Calculating the gain and
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 197
LOGO! functions
Parameters Delta1 and Delta2

The actual value of another already-programmed function the Delta1 and Delta2 parameters.
You can use the actual value of the following functions:

Applies only to the Aen, Ax, Δ 1 and Δ 2 values displayed in a message text.
LOGO!
198 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram
A 0 to 1 transition at input En saves the value of the signal at the analog input Ax. This saved
process variable is referred to as "Aen".
Both the analog actual values Ax and Aen are multiplied by the value at parameter A (gain),
and parameter B (offset) is then added to the product:
(Ax • gain) + offset = Actual value Aen, when input En changes from 0 to 1, or
(Ax • gain) + offset = Actual value Ax.
Output Q is set when the signal at input En = 1 and if the actual value at input Ax is out of
range of Aen - Δ 2 to Aen + Δ 1 .
Output Q is reset, when the actual value at input Ax lies within the range of Aen - Δ 2 to Aen+
Δ 1, or when the signal at input En changes to lo.

The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the used sensors to the respective
application.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 199
LOGO! functions
4.4.22 Analog amplifier
Short description
This special function amplifies the value of an analog input and outputs the result at an
analog output.

• AI1 to AI8 (*)
• AM1 to AM64
• NAI1 to NAI32
• AQ1 to AQ8
• NAQ1 to NAQ16
Parameter A: gain
B: zero offset
Output AQ This special function has an analog output. This out-
put can only be connected with analog inputs, analog
flags, analog outputs or network analog outputs.
Range of values for AQ:
-32767 to 32767
* AI1...AI8: 0 V to 10 V corresponds with 0 to 1000 (internal value).

Please note the information on gain and offset parameters in topic Calculating the gain and
offset of analog values (Page 134).

Applies only to the AQ value in a message text.
The function fetches the analog signal of input Ax.
This value is multiplied by the value of the A (gain) parameter, and parameter B (offset) is
then added to the product: (Ax • gain) + offset = actual value Ax.
The actual value Ax is output at AQ.
LOGO!
200 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Analog output
If you interconnect this special function with a real analog output, note that the analog output
can only process values between 0 and 1000. To do this, you may need to connect an
additional amplifier between the analog output of the special function and the real analog
output. Using this amplifier, you standardize the output range of the special function to a
value range of 0 to 1000.
Scaling an analog input value

You can influence the analog input value of a potentiometer by interconnecting an analog
input with an analog amplifier and an analog flag.
● Scale the analog value at the analog amplifier for further use.
● Connect, for example, the time base for parameter T of a time function (e.g. On-/Off-delay
(Page 147)) or the on and/or off limit specification of an up/down counter (Page 178) to
the scaled analog value.
For more information with programming examples refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft
Comfort.

LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 201
LOGO! functions
4.4.23 Latching relay
Short description
Input S sets output Q, input R resets output Q again.

Input S You set output Q with a signal at input S.
Input R You reset output Q with a signal at input R. If S and R
= 1, the output is reset.
Parameter Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
Output Q Q is set with a signal at input S, and reset with a
signal at input R.
Timing diagram
Switching response
A latching relay represents a simple binary element. The output value depends on the status
at the inputs and on the previous output status. The following table shows the logic once
again:
Sn Rn Q Comment
0 0 x The status is retentive
0 1 0 Reset
1 0 1 Set
1 1 0 Reset (takes priority over Set)
When retentivity is enabled, the current status of the output signal is retained after a power
failure.
LOGO!
202 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.24 Pulse relay
Short description
A short pulse at the input sets and resets the output.

Input Trg You set and reset output Q with a signal at input Trg
(Trigger).
Input S You set output Q with a signal at input S.
Input R You reset output Q with a signal at input R.
Parameter Selection:
RS (R input priority) or
SR (S input priority)
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
Output Q Q is set with a signal at Trg, and reset with the next
signal at Trg, if S and R = 0.
Timing diagram
Output Q changes its status; that is, the output is set or reset with each 0 to 1 transition at
input Trg and if the inputs S and R = 0.
The signal at input Trg does not influence the special function when S or R = 1.
You set the pulse relay with a signal at input S. The output is set hi.
You reset the pulse relay with a signal at input R. The output is set lo.
Status diagram
Par Qn-1 S R Trg Qn

* 0 0 0 0 0
* 0 0 0 0 ->1 1**
* 0 0 1 0 0
* 0 0 1 0 ->1 0
* 0 1 0 0 1
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 203
LOGO! functions
Par Qn-1 S R Trg Qn

* 0 1 0 0 ->1 1
RS 0 1 1 0 0
RS 0 1 1 0 ->1 0
SR 0 1 1 0 1
SR 0 1 1 0 ->1 1
* 1 0 0 0 1
* 1 0 0 0 ->1 0**
* 1 0 1 0 0
* 1 0 1 0 ->1 0
* 1 1 0 0 1
* 1 1 0 0 ->1 1
RS 1 1 1 0 0
RS 1 1 1 0 ->1 0
SR 1 1 1 0 1
SR 1 1 1 0 ->1 1
*: RS or SR
**: Triggering signal is effective, because S and R = 0.
Depending on your configuration, either input R takes priority over input S (input S is not
effective when R = 1), or vice versa (input R is not effective when S = 1).
After a power failure, the pulse relay and output Q are reset if you have not enabled
retentivity.
This special function is not available in parameter assignment mode.
Note
If Trg = 0 and Par = RS, the special function "Pulse relay" corresponds with the special
function "Latching relay (Page 202)".
4.4.25 Message texts
Short description
With the message text function block, you can configure a message that includes text and
other parameters for LOGO! to display in RUN mode.
LOGO!
204 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
You can configure simple message texts from the LOGO! onboard display. LOGO!Soft
Comfort provides an extended set of features for message texts: bar graph representation of
data, names for digital I/O states and more. Refer to the LOGO!Soft Comfort documentation
for information on these features.
Global message text settings

You configure global parameters that apply to all message texts on the programming menu:
● Analog time: refresh rate in milliseconds that specifies how frequently analog inputs in
message texts are updated
● Tick time: frequency at which message texts scroll on and off the display
There are two ways that a message text can tick on and off the screen: line by line, or
character by character, which are described in more detail below. A line of a text
message, or each character of a text message in turn will tick on and off the
LOGO! onboard display based on the tick time. For a message that ticks line by line, the
actual tick time is ten times the configured tick time. For messages that tick character by
character, the actual tick time is the configured tick time.
● Current character set: which character set is selected for the display of message texts.
Options Set1 and Set2 can be any of the supported character sets forLOGO!:
Character set in Common Supported lan- Internet reference

LOGO! name guages
ISO8859-1 Latin-1 English, German, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO/IEC_8859-1
Italian, Spanish
(partly), Dutch (part-
ly)
ISO8859-5 Cyrillic Russian http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO/IEC_8859-5
ISO8859-9 Latin-5 Turkish http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO/IEC_8859-9
ISO8859-16 Latin-10 French http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO/IEC_8859-16
GB-2312 Chinese Chinese http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GB2312
Shift-JIS Japanese Japanese http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shift-jis
Of the 50 possible message texts that you can configure, you can select any number of them
to be from the first language and any number from the second language. For example, you
could configure 50 message text function blocks that have a single message text for
Character Set 1. Alternatively, you could configure twenty-five message text function blocks,
each of which has two message texts: one for Character Set 1 and one for Character Set 2.
Any combination is valid such that the total does not exceed 50.
Within a single message text, the text must be from one character set. You can edit
message texts in any of the supported character sets from LOGO!Soft Comfort. From
LOGO! Basic, you can only edit text using characters from the ISO8859-1 character set.
The language and therefore character set of a message text is independent of the language
setting for menus on the LOGO! onboard display. They can be different.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 205
LOGO! functions
Chinese character set

LOGO! Basic and the LOGO! TDE support the Chinese character set (GB-2312) for the
People's Republic of China. The devices use Microsoft Windows encoding for this character
set. The Windows encoding allows the devices to display the same characters as shown in
the LOGO!Soft Comfort message text editor when you are using a Chinese emulator or a
Chinese version of Microsoft Windows.
The Chinese character set requires a Chinese version of Windows or a Chinese emulator to
properly display Chinese characters in the LOGO!Soft Comfort message text editor. You
must start the Chinese emulator before you open the the message text function block in
LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Programming global message text parameters
LOGO!
206 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Message text function block

Input En A 0 to 1 transition at input En (Enable) starts the
output of the message text.
Parameter Ack: acknowledgment of the message text
Msg Text: input of the message text
Priority: priority of the message text
Range of values: 0 to 127
Tick Type:
• C-C: tick message character by character
• L-L: tick message line by line
Msg. Dst: message destination (BM, TDE or Both)
Web Show: show LOGO! Basic on Web server
Line tick settings (to define whether a line ticks):
• Line1 Tick
• Line2 Tick
• Line3 Tick
• Line4 Tick
• Line5 Tick
• Line6 Tick
Note: You can only edit the Text parameter of the
message from LOGO! Basic. ISO8859-1 is the only
available character set for editing text. You can edit
all other parameters, and other languages for the
Text parameter from LOGO!Soft Comfort. For config-
uration details, refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft
Comfort.
Output Q Q remains set as long as the message text is set.
Restriction
A maximum of 50 message text blocks are available.
When LOGO! is in RUN mode, LOGO! displays the message text that you have configured
along with its parameter values upon a 0 to 1 transition of the signal at input En.
Based on your setting for the message destination, the message text displays on the
LOGO! onboard display, the LOGO! TDE, or both.
If you use flag M27 in your circuit program, then if M27=0 (low) then LOGO! displays the
message text only if it is from the primary character set (Character Set 1). If M27=1 (high),
then LOGO! displays the message text only if it is from the secondary character set
(Character Set 2). (See the M27 flag description in topic Constants and connectors
(Page 119)).
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 207
LOGO! functions
If you have configured message ticking, the message will tick on and off the display
according to your specifications, either a character at a time, or a line at a time.
If acknowledgment is disabled (Ack = No), the message text is hidden when the status of the
signal at input En changes from 1 to 0.
If acknowledgment is enabled (Ack = Yes) and the status of the signal at input En changes
from 1 to 0, the message text is output until it is acknowledged with OK. When En = 1, you
cannot acknowledge the message text.
When multiple message text functions are triggered with En=1, LOGO! displays the message
text with the highest priority (0 = lowest, 127 = highest). This also means that LOGO!
displays a newly activated message text only if its priority is higher than that of previously
activated message texts.
After a message text is disabled or acknowledged, the function automatically shows the
previously active message text that takes the highest priority.
You can press the and keys to step through multiple active message texts.
Example
This is how two message texts could be shown:
Message ticking
You can configure message text lines to tick or not tick. Two types of message ticking exist:
● Character by character
● Line by line
LOGO!
208 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Messages that tick character by character scroll off the characters of the message line one
character at a time to the left with the additional characters scrolling in one at a time from the
right. The time interval for the tick is specified by the TickTime message text setting.
Messages that tick line by line scroll one half of the message off the display to the left with
the second half of the message scrolling in from the right. The time interval for the tick is ten
times the TickTime parameter. The two halves of the message simply alternate on the
LOGO! onboard display or LOGO! TDE.
Example: tick message character by character

The following illustration shows a one-line, 24-character message text:
If you set this message to tick "character by character" with a tick interval of 0.1 seconds,
then the initial appearance of this message line on the LOGO! onboard display or
LOGO! TDE is as shown in this illustration:
After 0.1 second, one character of the message line ticks. The message appears as follows
on the LOGO! onboard display or LOGO! TDE:
Example: tick message line by line

The following example uses the same message configuration as the previous example:
If you set this message to tick "line by line" with a tick interval of 0.1 seconds, then the initial
appearance of this message on the LOGO! onboard display or LOGO! TDE is the left half of
the message as shown in this illustration:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 209
LOGO! functions
After 1 second (10 x 0.1 second), the message ticks to show the right half of the message as
shown in this illustration:
The screen display alternates between the two message halves every second.
You can configure each individual line of a message text to tick or not tick. The "character by
character" or "line by line" setting applies to all lines that you configure to tick.

From the input P, you configure the following characteristics of the message text:
● Priority
● Acknowledgement
● Message destination
● Tick type, and tick setting for each line
1. Press to position the cursor on the "ACK" line.

2. Press OK. Enable "Ack": Press or
3. Position the cursor on the "Msg Text" line by pressing . Press OK twice. To select a line
for the message text, press and . LOGO! shows as follows:
4. Press and to select the letter to be displayed in the text. To move the cursor from
one position to another, press and .
Note
The list of available characters is the same as for the circuit program name. The
character set is found in topic Circuit program input (Page 72). When you enter message
text from LOGO! Basic, you can only enter characters from the ISO8859-1 character set.
To enter text from another language, you must enter the text in LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Note that the number of characters per line of message text can be greater than the
number of character positions on the LOGO! onboard display.
LOGO!
210 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions

6. Press to position the cursor on the "Priority" line.
7. Increase the priority by pressing .
8. Press to position the cursor on the "Msg. Dst" line.
9. Press or to toggle through the three choices for message destination: BM, TDE, or
Both.
10.Press to position the cursor on the "Tick Type" line.
11.Press or to select either "C-C" or "L-L" for the "Tick Type".

12.Enable or disable ticking for each line of the message text by pressing . LOGO!
displays as follows:
13.To choose between "No" and "Yes" to define whether Line 1 ticks, press or
14.Press to move the cursor to the second line, and press or to choose between
"No" and "Yes" for Line 2. Configure line ticking for lines 3, 4, 5 and 6 in the same way as
for lines 1 and 2.
15.Position the cursor on the "Web Show" line by pressing . Press or to select
between "No" and "Yes" for "Web Show".
16.Press OK to confirm the complete message text configuration.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 211
LOGO! functions
Visible parameters or process variables

The following parameters or process variables can be displayed in a message text, as either
numerical values or bar-graph representations of values:
Special function Parameter or process variable visible in a mes-

sage text
Timers
On-delay T, Ta
Off-delay T, Ta
On-/Off-delay Ta, TH, TL
Retentive on-delay T, Ta
Wiping relay T, Ta
(pulse output)
Edge triggered Ta, TH, TL
wiping relay
Asynchronous pulse generator Ta, TH, TL
Random generator TH, TL
Stairway lighting switch Ta, T, T!, T!L
Multiple function switch Ta, T, TL, T!, T!L
Weekly timer 3*on/off/day
Yearly timer On, Off
Astronomical clock Longitude, latitude, zone, TS, TR
Stopwatch TB, Ta, Lap, AQ
Counter
Up/down counter Cnt, On, Off
Hours counter MI, Q, OT
Threshold trigger fa, On, Off, G_T
Analog
Analog threshold trigger On, Off, A, B, Ax
Analog differential trigger On, n, A, B, Ax, Off
Analog comparator On, Off, A, B, Ax, Ay, nA
Analog watchdog n, A, B, Ax, Aen
Analog amplifier A, B, Ax
Analog multiplexer V1, V2, V3, V4, AQ
Analog ramp L1, L2, MaxL, StSp, Rate, A, B, AQ
PI controller SP, Mq, KC, TI, Min, Max, A, B, PV, AQ
Mathematic instruction V1, V2, V3, V4, AQ
PWM (Pulse Width Modulator) A, B, T, Ax amplified
Miscellaneous
Latching relay -
Pulse relay -
Message texts -
Softkey On/Off
Shift register -
LOGO!
212 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Special function Parameter or process variable visible in a mes-

sage text
Analog filter Sn, Ax, AQ
Max/Min Mode, Min, Max, Ax, AQ
Average value Ax, St, Sn, AQ
For timers, a message text can also display the remaining time. "Remaining time" refers to
how much time of the parameter setting remains.
Bar graphs can be either horizontal or vertical representations of the current or actual value
scaled between the minimum and maximum value. For more information on configuring and
displaying bar graphs in message texts, refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Editing message texts

You can only edit simple message texts from LOGO! Basic. You cannot edit message texts
that contain features such as bar graphs, I/O status names, and others from LOGO! Basic.
You can only edit these types of message texts from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Also, you cannot edit message texts from LOGO! Basic that contain any of the following
parameters:
● Par
● Time
● Date
● EnTime
● EnDate
● Analog input
● Digital I/O status
● Special characters (for example: ±, €)
You can only edit such message texts from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Changing parameters in the active message text

When the message text is active, press ESC to select the editing mode.
Note
You must keep the ESC key pressed for at least one second.
Press and to select the relevant parameter. Press OK to change the parameter. Use
the and keys to edit a parameter.
Confirm your changes with OK. You can now edit further parameters in the message text (if
any exist). Press ESC to exit editing mode.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 213
LOGO! functions
Key input simulation in the active message text

You can enable the four cursor keys C , C ,C and C in an active message text by
pressing ESC plus the relevant cursor key.
4.4.26 Softkey
Short description
This special function has the effect of a mechanical pushbutton or switch.

Input En Output Q is set with a 0 to 1 transition of the signal at
input En (Enable), and if "Switch=On" was confirmed
in parameter assignment mode.
Parameter Programming mode:
Selecting the function for pushbutton action for the
duration of one cycle, or for switching action.
Start: on or off state, initialized at the first start of the
program if retentivity is disabled.
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
Parameter assignment mode (RUN mode):
Switch: switches the momentary pushbutton (switch)
on or off.
Output Q Switches on if En=1 and Switch=On was confirmed
with OK.
Factory setting
The default parameter setting is switching action.
Timing diagram
In parameter assignment mode, the output is set with a signal at input En, if the "Switch"
parameter is set to "On" and confirmed with OK. Whether the function was configured for
pushbutton or switching action is of no concern here.
LOGO!
214 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
The output is reset to "0" in the following three cases:

● After a 1 to 0 transition at input En
● When the function was configured for momentary pushbutton action, and one cycle has
expired since it was switched on
● When the position "Off" was selected at the "Switch" parameter and confirmed with OK in
parameter assignment mode
If retentivity is not set, output Q is initialized after a power failure according to your
configuration at the "Start" parameter.

1. Position the cursor on "Par". Press OK.
2. Press to position the cursor on the "On" line.
3. Press OK. Select "Momentary pushbutton" or "Switch": Press or .
4. Press to move the cursor to "Start" line.

5. To change the "Start" state: Press or .

Here, you can set or reset the "Switch" parameter (On/Off). When in RUN, LOGO! shows the
following display:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 215
LOGO! functions
Let us assume you want to set "Switch" (On).

1. Press OK (the cursor is now positioned on "Off").
2. To change from "Off" to "On": Press or .
4.4.27 Shift register
Short description
You can use the shift register function to read the value of an input and to shift its bits left or
right. The output value corresponds with the configured shift register bit. The shifting
direction can be changed at a special input.

Input In Input read at the start of the function.
Input Trg A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input Trg (Trig-
ger) starts the special function. 1 to 0 transitions are
irrelevant.
Input Dir The signal at input Dir determines the shifting direc-
tion for the shift register bits Sx.1 to Sx.8. "x" refers to
the configured shift register byte index 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Dir = 0: shift up
(Sx.1>>Sx.8)
Dir = 1: shift down
(Sx.8>>Sx.1)
Parameter Shift register bit that determines the value at output
Q.
Possible settings:
Byte index: 1 to 4
Q: S1 to S8
LOGO! provides a maximum of 32 shift register bits,
with eight bits per shift register.
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
Output Q The output value corresponds with the configured
shift register bit.
The function reads the value at input In with a positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input Trg
(Trigger).
LOGO!
216 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
This value is applied to shift register bit Sx.1 or Sx.8 depending on the shifting direction,
where "x" refers to the index number of the shift register and the number after the decimal
point refers to the bit number:
● Shift up: the value at input In is set at Sx.1; the previous value at Sx.1 is shifted to Sx.2;
the previous value at Sx.2 is shifted to Sx.3 etc.
● Shift down: the value at input In is set at Sx.8; the previous value at Sx.8 is shifted to Sx.7;
the previous value at Sx.7 is shifted to Sx.6 etc.
Output Q returns the value of the configured shift register bit.
If retentivity is disabled, the shift function restarts at Sx.1 or Sx.8 after a power failure. When
enabled, retentivity always applies to all shift register bits.
Note
There are a maximum of four shift register function blocks available for use in the circuit
program in LOGO!.
Timing diagram
The timing diagram example for the shift register in LOGO! is shown as follows:

The view above indicates that the configured shift register bit is S4.8.
This special function is not available in parameter assignment mode.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 217
LOGO! functions
4.4.28 Analog multiplexer
Short description
This special function outputs one of four predefined analog values or 0 at the analog output.

Input En A change in status from 0 to 1 at input En (Enable)
switches a parameterized analog value to the output
AQ, depending on the value of S1 and S2.
Inputs S1 and S2 S1 and S2 (selectors) for selecting the analog value
to be issued.
• S1 = 0 and S2 = 0:
value 1 is issued.
• S1 = 0 and S2 = 1:
value 2 is issued.
• S1 = 1 and S2 = 0:
value 3 is issued.
• S1 = 1 and S2 = 1:
value 4 is issued.
Parameter V1 to V4: analog values that will be issued.
Range of values: -32768 to 32767
Output AQ This special function has an analog output. This out-
put can only be connected with analog inputs, analog
flags, analog outputs or network analog outputs.
-32768 to 32767
Parameters V1...V4
The analog values for the parameters V1to V4 can be derived from another already-
programmed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog multiplexer (actual value AQ)
LOGO!
218 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions

Select the required function by the block number. For information on parameter defaults,
refer to the On-delay (Page 141) topic.

Applies only to the values displayed in a message text.
Timing diagram
If input En is set, then the function issues one of four possible analog values V1 to V4 at the
output AQ, depending on the value of S1 and S2.
If the input En is not set, then the function issues the analog value 0 at output AQ.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 219
LOGO! functions
Analog output
If you interconnect this special function with a real analog output, note that the analog output
can only process values between 0 and 1000. To do this, you may need to connect an
additional amplifier between the analog output of the special function and the real analog
output. Using this amplifier, you standardize the output range of the special function to a
value range of 0 to 1000.

LOGO!
220 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.29 Analog ramp
Short description
This function allows the output to be changed from the current level to the selected level at a
specified rate.

Input En A change in the status from 0 to 1 at input En (Ena-
ble) applies the start/stop level (Offset "B" + StSp) to
the output for 100 ms and starts the ramp operation
to the selected level.
A change in the status from 1 to 0 immediately sets
the current level to Offset "B", which makes output
AQ equal to 0.
Input Sel SeI = 0: level 1 is selected.
SeI = 1: level 2 is selected.
A change in status of Sel causes the current level to
start changing to the selected level at the specified
rate.
Input St A change in the status from 0 to 1 at input St (Decel-
erated Stop) causes the current level to decrease at a
constant rate until the start/stop level (Offset "B" +
StSp) is reached. The start/stop level is maintained
for 100 ms and then the current level is set to Offset
"B", which makes output AQ equal to 0.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 221
LOGO! functions

Parameter Level 1 and Level 2:
levels to be reached
Range of values for each level:
-10000 to 20000
MaxL:
maximum value that must not be exceeded under any
circumstances.
Range of values: -10000 to 20000
StSp:
Start/Stop offset: value that is added to Offset "B" to
create the start/stop level. If the Start/Stop offset is 0,
then the start/stop level is Offset "B".
Range of values:
0 to 20000
Rate:
acceleration with which level 1, level 2 or Offset is
reached. Steps/seconds are issued.
Range of values:
1 to 10000
A: gain
Range of values:
0 to 10.00
B: offset
Range of values:
-10000 to 10000
Range of values:
0, 1, 2, 3
Output AQ Range of values for AQ:
0 to 32767
(Current Level - Offset "B") / Gain "A"
Range of values:
0 to 32767
Note:
When AQ is displayed in parameter mode or mes-
sage mode, it is displayed as a scaled value, both on
the LOGO! Base Module and LOGO!Soft Comfort
(engineering units: current level).
Parameters L1, L2
The analog values for the parameters L1 and L2 can be derived from another already-
programmed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
LOGO!
222 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions

● Analog ramp (actual value AQ)

Applies only to the AQ, L1, L2, MaxL, StSp and Rate values displayed in a message text.
Timing diagram for AQ
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 223
LOGO! functions
If the input En is set, then the function sets the current level to StSp + Offset "B" for 100 ms.
Then, depending on the connection of Sel, the function runs from the level StSp + Offset "B"
to either level 1 or level 2 at the acceleration set in Rate.
If the input St is set, the function runs to a level of StSp + Offset "B" at the acceleration set in
Rate. Then the function holds the level at StSp + Offset "B" for 100 ms. After 100 ms, the
level is set to Offset "B". The scaled value (output AQ) is 0.
If the input St is set, the function can only be restarted after the inputs St and En have been
reset.
If input Sel has been changed, depending on the connection of Sel, the function runs from
the current target level to the new target level at the rate that is specified.
If the input En is reset, the function immediately sets the current level to Offset "B".
The current level is updated every 100 ms. Note the following relationship between output
AQ and the current level:
Output AQ = (current level - Offset "B" ) / Gain "A"
Note
For further information on analog value processing, please refer to the Online Help for
LOGO!Soft Comfort.

LOGO!
224 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.30 PI controller
Short description
Proportional-action and integral-action controllers. You can use both types of controller
individually or combined.

Input A/M Set the mode of the controller:
1: automatic mode
0: manual mode
Input R Use the input R to reset the output AQ. As long as
this input is set, the input A/M is disabled.
Output AQ is set to 0.
Input PV Analog value: process variable, influences the output
Parameter SP: set-value assignment
Range of values:
-10,000 to 20,000
KC: gain
Range of values:
00.00 to 99.99
TI: integral time
Range of values:
00:01m to 99:59 m
Dir: action direction of the controller
Range of values:
+ or -
Mq: value from AQ with manual mode
Range of values:
0 to 1,000
Min: minimum value for PV
Range of values:
-10,000 to 20,000
Max: maximum value for PV
Range of values:
-10,000 to 20,000
A: gain
Range of values:
-10.00 to 10.00
B: offset
Range of values:
-10,000 to 10,000
Range of values:
0, 1, 2, 3
Output AQ This special function has an analog output (= manipu-
lated variable). This output can only be connected
with analog inputs, analog flags, analog outputs or
network analog outputs.
0 to 1,000
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 225
LOGO! functions
Parameters SP and Mq
The set-value SP and the value for Mq can be provided by another already-programmed
function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● PI controller (actual value AQ)
Parameters KC, TI
Please note the following circumstances:
● If parameter KC has value 0, the "P" function (proportional control) will not be executed.
● If parameter TI has value 99:59 m, the "I" function (integral-action control) will not be
executed.

Applies only to the PV, SP, Min and Max values displayed in a message text.
LOGO!
226 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram
The nature, manner and speed with which the AQ changes depend on the parameters KC
and TI. Thus, the course of AQ in the diagram is merely an example. A control action is
continuous; therefore the diagram portrays just an extract.
1. A disturbance causes the PV to drop, as Dir is positioned upwards, AQ increases until PV

corresponds again to SP.
2. A disturbance causes the PV to drop, as Dir is positioned downwards, AQ decreases until
PV corresponds again to SP.
It is not possible to change the direction (Dir) at runtime of the function. The change is
shown here for illustrative purposes only.
3. As AQ is set to 0 by means of the input R, PV changes. This is based on the fact that PV
increases, which on account of Dir = upwards causes AQ to drop.
If the input A/M is set to 0, then the special function issues output AQ with the value that you
set with parameter Mq.
If the input A/M is set to 1, then automatic mode commences. As an integral sum the value
Mq is adopted, the controller function begins the calculations.
Note
For further information on the controller basics, please refer to the Online Help for
LOGO!Soft Comfort.
The updated value PV is used to calculate in the formulas:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 227
LOGO! functions
Updated value PV = (PV • gain) + offset

● If the updated value PV = SP, then the special function does not change the value of AQ.
● Dir = upwards (+) (timing diagram numbers 1. and 3.)
– If the updated value PV > SP, then the special function reduces the value of AQ.
– If the updated value PV < SP, then the special function increases the value of AQ.
● Dir = downwards (-) (timing diagram number 2.)
– If the updated value PV > SP, then the special function increases the value of AQ.
– If the updated value PV < SP, then the special function reduces the value of AQ.
With a disturbance, AQ continues to increase / decrease until the updated value PV again
corresponds to SP. The speed with which AQ changes depends on the parameters KC and
TI.
If the input PV exceeds the parameter Max, then the updated value PV is set to the value of
Max. If the PV falls short of the parameter Min, then the updated value PV is set to the value
of Min.
If the input R is set to 1, then the AQ output is reset. As long as R is set, the input A/M is
disabled.
Sampling time
The sampling time is fixed at 500 ms.
Parameter sets
For more information and application examples with application-related parameter sets for
KC, TI and Dir, refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.

LOGO!
228 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.31 Pulse width modulator (PWM)
Short description
The Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) instruction modulates the analog input value Ax to a
pulsed digital output signal. The pulse width is proportional to the analog value Ax.

Input En A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input En enables
the PWM function block.
Input Ax Analog signal to be modulated to a pulsed digital
output signal.
Parameter A: gain
B: zero offset
Range of values: 10,000 to 10,000
T: periodic time over which the digital output is modu-
lated
Min:
Max:
Output Q Q is set or reset for the proportion of each time period
according to the proportion of the standardized value
Ax to the analog value range.
Parameter T
The periodic time T can be provided by the actual value of another already-programmed
function. You can use the actual value of the following functions:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 229
LOGO! functions

Parameters p (number of decimals)

Parameter p applies only to the display of the Ax value in a message text.
The function reads the value of the signal at the analog input Ax.
This value is multiplied by the value of parameter A (gain). Parameter B (offset) is added to
the product, as follows:
(Ax • Gain) + Offset = Actual value Ax
The function block calculates the proportion of the actual value Ax to the range. The block
sets the digital output Q high for the same proportion of the T (periodic time) parameter, and
sets Q low for the remainder of the time period.
Examples with timing diagrams

The following examples show how the PWM instruction modulates a digital output signal
from the analog input value:
Example 1
Analog input value: 500 (range 0 to 1,000)
Periodic time T: four seconds
The digital output of the PWM function is 2 seconds high, 2 seconds low, 2 seconds high, 2
seconds low and continues in that pattern as long as parameter "En" = high.
LOGO!
230 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
Example 2
Analog input value: 300 (range 0 to 1,000)
Periodic time T: 10 seconds
The digital output of the PWM function is three seconds high, seven seconds low, three
seconds high, seven seconds low and continues in that pattern as long as parameter "En" =
high.
Calculation rule
Q = 1, for (Ax - Min)/ (Max - Min) of time period T, when Min < Ax < Max.
Q = 0, for PT - [ (Ax - Min) / (Max - Min) ] of periodic time T.
Note: Ax in this calculation refers to the actual value Ax as calculated using the Gain and
Offset.
Setting the Par Parameter

The following illustration shows the view in programming mode that corresponds to the first
example:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 231
LOGO! functions
4.4.32 Mathematic instruction
Short description
The mathematic instruction block calculates the value AQ of an equation formed from the
user-defined operands and operators.

ble) enables the mathematic instruction function
block.
Parameter V1: first operand value
V2: second operand value
V3: third operand value
V4: fourth operand value
Op1: first operator

Op2: second operator
Op3: third operator
Operator Prio: priority of the operands
Qen→0:
0: reset value of AQ to 0 when En=0
1: retain last value of AQ when En=0
Output AQ The output AQ is the result of the equation formed
from the operand values and operators. AQ will be
set to 32767 if a divide by 0 or overflow occurs, and -
32768 if a negative overflow (underflow) occurs.
Parameters V1 to V4
Another already-programmed function can provide the analog values for the parameters V1
to V4. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
LOGO!
232 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions

● Mathematic instruction (actual value AQ)
Note
If the analog value for parameter V1, V2, V3 or V4 is derived from another already-
programmed function whose actual value exceeds the value range for V1 to V4, LOGO! will
display the limit value -32768 if the value is less than the lower range or 32767 if the value is
greater than the upper range.
Parameters p (number of decimals)

Parameter p applies only to the display of Value1, Value2, Value3, Value4 and AQ in a
message text.
The mathematic instruction function combines the four operations and three operators to
form an equation. The operator can be any one of the four standard operators: +, -, *, or /.
The priority of operators is determined by "( )" and "[ ]", in which "( )" has a higher priority.
The operand values can reference another previously-defined function to provide the value.
The mathematic instruction function rounds the result to the nearest integer value.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 233
LOGO! functions
The number of operand values is fixed at four and the number of operators is fixed at 3. If
you need to use fewer operands, use constructions such as + 0 or * 1 to fill the remaining
parameters.
You can also configure the behavior of the function when the Enable parameter En=0. The
function block can either retain its last value, or be set to 0. If the parameter Qen → 0 = 0,
then the function sets AQ to 0 when En=0. If the parameter Qen → 0 = 1, then the function
leaves AQ at its last value when En=0.
Possible errors: zero division and overflow

If the mathematic instruction function block execution results in zero division or overflow, it
sets internal bits that indicate the type of error that occurred. You can program a mathematic
instruction error detection function block in your circuit program to detect these errors, and to
control the program behavior as needed. You program one mathematic instruction error
detection function block to reference one specific mathematic instruction function block.
Examples
The following tables show some simple example mathematic instruction block parameters,
and the resulting equations and output values:
V1 Op1 V2 Op2 V3 Op3 V4

(Priority) (Priority) (Priority)
12 [+] 6 (/) 3 - 1
Equation: [12 + (6 / 3)] - 1

Result: 13

2 (+) 3 [*] 1 + 4
Equation: 2 + [3 * (1 + 4)]
Result: 17

100 (-) 25 / 2 [+] 1
Equation: (100 - 25) / [2 + 1]

Result: 25
LOGO!
234 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions

The following illustration shows the view in programming mode that corresponds to the first
example [12 + (6 / 3)] - 1:
4.4.33 Mathematic instruction error detection
Short description
The mathematic instruction error detection block sets an output if an error has occurred in
the referenced Mathematic instruction (Page 232) function block.

ble) enables the mathematic instruction error detec-
tion block.
Input R A signal at input R resets the output.
Parameter MathBN: block number of a mathematic instruction
Err: ZD: divide by 0 error
OF: overflow error
ZD/OF: (divide by 0 error) OR
(overflow error)
AutoRst: reset the output before the next execution of
the mathematic instruction error function block. Y =
yes; N = no
Output Q Q is set high if the error to detect occurred in the last
execution referenced mathematic instruction function
block.
Parameter MathBN
The value for the MathBN parameter references the block number of an already-
programmed mathematic instruction function block.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 235
LOGO! functions
The mathematic instruction error detection block sets the output when the referenced
mathematic instruction function block has an error. You can program the function to set the
output on a zero division error, an overflow error, or when either type of error occurs.
If AutoRst is set, the output is reset prior to the next execution of the function block. If
AutoRst is not set, then whenever the output is set it remains set until the mathematic
instruction error detection block is reset with the R parameter. In this way, even if the error
subsequently clears, the circuit program still has knowledge that an error did occur at some
point.
In any scan cycle, if the referenced mathematic instruction function block executes before
the mathematic instruction error detection function block, the error is detected in the same
scan cycle. If the referenced mathematic instruction function block executes after the
mathematic instruction error detection function block, the error is detected in the next scan
cycle.
Mathematic instruction error detection logic table

In the table below, Err represents the parameter of the mathematic instruction error detection
instruction that selects which type of error to detect. ZD represents the zero division bit set
by the mathematic instruction at the end of its execution: 1 if the error occurred, 0 if not. OF
represents the overflow bit set by the mathematic instruction: 1 if the error occurred, 0 if not.
The ZD/OF Err parameter represents the logical OR of the zero division bit and overflow bit
of the referenced mathematic instruction. Q represents the output of the mathematic
instruction error detection function. An "x" indicates that the bit can be either 0 or 1 with no
influence on the output.
Err ZD OF Q
ZD 1 x 1
ZD 0 x 0
OF x 1 1
OF x 0 0
ZD/OF 1 0 1
ZD/OF 0 1 1
ZD/OF 1 1 1
ZD/OF 0 0 0
If the MathBN parameter is null, then the output Q is always 0.

The parameters MathBN, AutoRst, and Err can be set in programming mode or parameter
assignment mode.
LOGO!
236 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.34 Analog filter
Short description
The analog filter function smooths the analog input signal.

Ax Input Ax is the analog input signal to be smoothed.
Input Ax is one of the following analog signals:
• AI1 to AI8 (*)
• AM1 to AM64
• NAI1 to NAI32
• AQ1 to AQ8
• NAQ1 to NAQ16
Parameter Sn (Number of samples) determines how many ana-
log values are sampled within the program cycles that
are determined by the set number of samples. LOGO!
samples an analog value within every program cycle.
The number of program cycles is equal to the set
number of samples.
Possible settings:
8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256
Output AQ AQ is the average value of input Ax over the current
number of samples.
* AI1 to AI8: 0 V to 10 V corresponds with 0 to 1000 (internal value).
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 237
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram (example)
The function fetches the analog signal at input Ax based on the set number of samples (Sn)
and outputs the average value.
Note
There are a maximum of eight analog filter function blocks available for use in the circuit
program in LOGO!.

LOGO!
238 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.35 Max/Min
Short description
The Max/Min function records the maximum or minimum value of Ax.

En A signal at input En (Enable) outputs an analog value
to AQ, depending on the settings of parameters ERst
and Mode.
S1 S1 functions only when the parameter Mode is set to
2.
If Mode is set to 2, a change in status from 0 to 1 at
input S1 (selector) outputs the maximum value to AQ.
If Mode is set to 2, a change in status from 1 to 0 at
S1 outputs the minimum value to AQ.
Ax Input Ax is one of the following analog signals:
• AI1 to AI8 (*)
• AM1 to AM64
• NAI1 to NAI32
• AQ1 to AQ8
• NAQ1 to NAQ16
Parameter Mode:
Possible settings:
0, 1, 2, 3
Mode = 0: AQ = Min
Mode = 1: AQ = Max
Mode = 2 and S1= 0 (low): AQ = Min
Mode = 2 and S1= 1 (high): AQ = Max
Mode = 3: AQ = Actual value of Ax
ERst (Enable Reset):
Possible settings:
ERst = 0: disable reset
ERst = 1: enable reset
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
R = the status is retentive
Output AQ The function issues a minimum, maximum, or current
value at AQ, depending on your configuration.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 239
LOGO! functions
Parameter Mode
The actual value of another already-programmed function can provide the value for
parameter Mode. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Max/Min (actual value AQ)
LOGO!
240 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
ERst = 1 and En = 0: the function sets the AQ value to 0.
ERst = 1 and En = 1: the function outputs a value at AQ, depending on the settings of Mode
and S1.
ERst = 0 and En = 0: the function holds the value of AQ at the current value.
ERst = 0 and En = 1: the function outputs a value at AQ, depending on the settings of Mode
and S1.
Mode = 0: the function sets AQ to the minimum value
Mode = 1: the function sets AQ to the maximum value
Mode = 2 and S1 = 0: the function sets AQ to the minimum value
Mode = 2 and S1 = 1: the function sets AQ to the maximum value
Mode = 3: the function outputs current analog input value.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 241
LOGO! functions

View in programming mode (example)
View in parameter assignment mode (example)
LOGO!
242 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! functions
4.4.36 Average value
Short description
The average value function calculates the average value of an analog input over a
configured time period.

En A change in status from 0 to 1 transition at input En
starts the average value function.
A change in status from 1 to 0 at input En holds the
analog output value.
R A signal at input R clears the analog output value.
Ax Input Ax is one of the following analog signals:
• AI1 to AI8 (*)
• AM1 to AM64
• NAI1 to NAI32
• AQ1 to AQ8
• NAQ1 to NAQ16
Parameter St (Sampling time): you can set the timebase to s
(seconds), d (days), h (hours), or m (minutes).
Range of values:
St = s: 1 to 59
St = d: 1 to 365
St = h: 1 to 23
St = m: 1 to 59
Sn (Number of samples):
Range of values:
St = s: 1 to St*100
St = d: 1 to 32767
St = h: 1 to 32767
St = m and St ≤ 5 minutes: 1 to St*6000
St = m and St ≥ 6 minutes: 1 to 32767
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
R = retentivity
Output AQ Outputs the average value of input Ax over config-
ured time sampling period.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 243
LOGO! functions
This function fetches the analog input signal according to both the set sampling time St and
the number of samples Sn and outputs the average value. A signal at R sets AQ to 0.

LOGO!
244 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Web server 5
LOGO! 0BA8 has a built-in Web server which enables you to operate the LOGO! Base
Module or the LOGO! TDE from a traditional PC or a mobile device.
In this approach, you can access the LOGO! Base Module or the LOGO! TDE using a
connected device (conventional PC, tablet or smart phone with Web browsing capabilities)
through its IP address.
The Web server allows you to use the mouse pointer or the touch screen, depending on the
device you are using, to perform fast and easy operations on the virtualized LOGO! Base
Module and LOGO! TDE.
LOGO! 0BA8 also provides access security control over the Web server. For more
information, see section Network access security (Page 287).
5.1 Enabling the Web server

Make sure you have connected your PC or mobile device to the desired LOGO! Base
Module or LOGO! TDE, and guarantee you have enabled the Web user access in
LOGO!Soft Comfort according to instructions in the user profile settings of the Online Help
for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Supported network explorers

The LOGO! Web server supports the following Web browsers:
● Microsoft Internet Explorer with minimum version 8.0
● Mozilla Firefox with minimum version 11.0
● Google Chrome with minimum version 16.0
● Apple Safari with minimum version 5.0
● Opera with minimum version 12.0
Note
Make sure you do not disable cookies on your browser.
Supported devices
The LOGO! Web server supports the following communications devices when you use one
of the above explorers:
● Conventional PC
● Apple iPhone series
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 245
Web server
5.2 Logging on to the Web server
● Apple iPad series

● Smart phones and tablets with Android system with minimum version Android 2.0
Supported Web page language versions

The LOGO! Web server supports the following Web page lanuages:
● German
● English
● Italian
● French
● Spanish
● Chinese Simplified
● Japanese

Follow the steps below to log on to the desired LOGO! Base Module.
1. Open your Web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of your LOGO! Base Module in the IP address bar.
– LAN (Local Area Network) access:
– Remote access:
Note
Make sure you have enabled TCP port 8080 for remote access.
LOGO!
246 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Web server
3. Click or tap the button. The LOGO! Web server redirects you to the welcome page.
Note
If you have enabled Web user access without changing the password, you can log on
with the default password "LOGO".
4. Select an appropriate language from the drop-down menu if needed.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 247
Web server
5.3 Viewing LOGO! system information
5. Enter the password.
Note
• You can only enable the Web server access or change the logon password using
LOGO!Soft Comfort. For more information about setting the user password, refer to
the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
• If you do not desire to enter the user name and password again at the next logon, you
can select the "①" check box. Make sure you do not set your browser to private
mode, since your browser does not record any browsing history or passwords in this
mode.
• You can access one LOGO! Base Module from multiple LOGO! Web server clients,
but due to memory usage, this might also impact the performance of the connected
Base Module.
6. Click or tap "②" to log on to the Web server.
Note
• For remote access, the logon may take several seconds.
• If your logon fails, press or tap the refresh button on your browser (or press the
keyboard shortcut "F5" on the conventional PC) to try it again.
LOGO!
248 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Web server

Once logged in, the LOGO! Web server displays all the system information of the LOGO!
Base Module including module generation, module type, firmware (FW) version, IP address,
and module status.
Note
The firmware verison in the screen above is listed for example, your LOGO! device may be
of an later version.
5.4 Operating the virtual module on the Web server

The LOGO! Web server enables you to do the following operations on the virtual LOGO!
Base Module through LOGO! BM menu and the virtual LOGO! TDE through LOGO! TD
menu.
Operating the keys on the virtual module

If you have previously programmed the cursor keys and function keys in your circuit program,
you can perform the following basic operations with these keys on the virtual LOGO! Base
Module or LOGO! TDE:
To enable the functionality of the programmed cursor, click or tap the ESC key. Function
keys are always enabled.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 249
Web server
You can then proceed as follows:

● To enable pulse inputs, click or tap the cursor key or function key concerned.
● To enable continuous high-level signal inputs, double-click or double-tap the cursor key or
function key concerned.
● To disable the programmed cursor key or function key, click or tap the ESC key again.
● To disable the display of an active message as long as this message has been previously
configured in LOGO!Soft Comfort as acknowledgable, click or tap the OK key.
Viewing message text

If you have configured your message text on LOGO!Soft Comfort according to the
instructions in the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort, you are then able to see them on the
virtual screen of the module.
LOGO!
250 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Web server
Click or tap LOGO! BM or LOGO! TD on the left navigation bar and you can view active
messages on the virtual device.
● On the LOGO! Base Module:
● On the LOGO! TDE:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 251
Web server
You can click or tap or to tick manually for available messages.
Note
The and are gray, indicating they are not applicable in viewing message texts.
Viewing message text ticking

If you have configured message ticking settings on LOGO!Soft Comfort according to the
instructions in the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort, you can see the message text ticking
by lines or characters on the virtual LOGO! Base Module or LOGO! TDE.
Checking backlight color status

If you have configured backlight color settings on LOGO!Soft Comfort according to the
instructions in the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort, you can see the same backlight effect
displayed on the virtual LOGO! Base Module or LOGO! TDE.
Setting the configurable parameters

If you have configured to show certain parameters on LOGO! Base Module or LOGO! TDE
according to the instructions in the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort, you can see them
displayed on the screen.
LOGO!
252 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Web server
Double-click or double-tap on the displayed parameter to activate the parameter modification

dialog. A parameter is grayed out when it is not editable.
Enter the desired parameter value in line "①" on the above screens. In this example, enter
"20:00s".
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 253
Web server
Make sure you have strictly followed the example of your current value. Any inconsistency
may cause errors on the module.
Click or tap "②". The updated parameter is displayed.
LOGO!
254 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Web server
5.5 Viewing and editing variable memory tables
5.5 Viewing and editing variable memory tables

The LOGO! Web server allows you to check and modify variable memory tables on the Web
browser.
For complete description on the LOGO! variables, refer to the "Parameter VM mapping"
section of the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Click or tap "①" on the left navigation bar to show the variable table.
Click or tap "②" to add a new variable. Follow the steps below to set the variable.
1. Choose a desired range. Web server displays the mapping address, variable type,
display format of the range.
2. Enter the new mapping address in the added empty column "③".
The indicates the variable is to be modified.
The indicates it is not editable.
Click or tap "④" to apply the new mapping addresses.
5.6 Logging off from the Web server

To log off from the Web server, click or tap the button on top of the left navigation bar .
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 255
Web server
5.6 Logging off from the Web server
LOGO!
256 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
UDF (User-Defined Function) 6
User-Defined Function (UDF)
LOGO!Soft Comfort provides you with a UDF (User-Defined Function) editor for creating
circuit programs. You can save circuit programs created in the UDF editor as individual UDF
blocks for use in a circuit program in the UDF or FBD editor.
A UDF block is a preconfigured circuit program that you create. You can add it to an existing
circuit program as you do with a function block. If the circuit program in LOGO!Soft Comfort
already contains a UDF, after transferring the program from LOGO!Soft Comfort to a LOGO!
0BA8, you can edit the elements connected to this UDF from the module.
For a detailed description of the UDF configuration in LOGO!Soft Comfort, refer to the Online
Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Editing elements connected to a UDF block

You can neither create a UDF block from LOGO! 0BA8, nor edit the members of the block.
You can only edit elements connected to the inputs or outputs of a UDF block or edit its
parameter settings.
Note
Each UDF block has a maximum of eight inputs and four outputs, dependent upon your
configuration in LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Editing elements to the inputs of a UDF block

2. Select "①" on the main menu: Press or

LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 257
UDF (User-Defined Function)
5. Press OK twice to enter circuit program edit mode. A "U" identifies a UDF block. "U1"
refers to the first UDF block. The following display shows you an example of the circuit
program that contains a UDF block configured from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
6. Move the cursor to "U1": Press , , or .

7. Press OK to enter the screen form for the first UDF block "U1". To select another element,
press the curor keys.
8. Position the cursor on the selected input ("I1" in this example) and press OK. The cursor
appears in a flashing solid square. If you want to change the first input to another element,
press or .
9. Confirm your selection by pressing OK. The first input of "U1" is now changed.
Editing elements to the outputs of a UDF block

If LOGO! shows the following screen form as shown in the above Step 5 and you want to
change "Q1" to another element, follow the steps below:
1. Press OK and LOGO! shows the following display:
2. Move the cursor to "In" by pressing . Press OK and the cursor appears in a flashing
solid square. You can change the input to "U1.1" (".1" refers to the first output of the UDF
LOGO!
258 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
block that is connected to "Q1") by pressing or and LOGO! shows the following
display:
3. Confirm your selection by pressing OK. Press ESC and LOGO! shows the following
display:
Now "U1" is connected to "Q3".

4. Press OK and move the cursor to "Q1" by pressing , , or . Press OK and LOGO!
shows the following display:
5. Press OK and the cursor appears in a flashing solid square. Select an empty input by
pressing or . Press OK and LOGO! shows the following display:
6. Press ESC and LOGO! shows the following display:
Now the connection between "U1" and "Q1" is removed.

You have changed the element connected to the first output of "U1" from "Q1" to "Q3".
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 259

You can edit the Par parameter for your UDF block if you have configured parameters for
this UDF using LOGO!Soft Comfort; otherwise, you cannot edit parameters for UDF blocks.
If your UDF block contains the Par parameter, you can edit the parameters as described
below:
1. Press to move the cursor to "Par" and press OK. LOGO! shows you the following
display (T and TH are the identifiers you specified for the relevant UDF parameters in
LOGO!Soft Comfort . You can configure a maximum of eight parameters for each UDF
block using LOGO!Soft Comfort. LOGO! can show a maximum of three parameters on a
single display.):
2. Press OK and the cursor moves to the first number of "T":
3. Press or to change the value. Press or to select another number and then
press or to change its value. Press OK to confirm your modifications. Then LOGO!
shows the following display:
You can also edit UDF parameter settings in parameter assignment mode in the same way
as you do in programming mode.
LOGO!
260 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Data log 7
You can configure a maximum of one data log for your circuit program using LOGO!Soft
Comfort. The data log records process measurement variables for function blocks that you
configure for data logging. You can add the data log instruction to your circuit program as
you do with a function block.
If you configured the data log for your circuit program, after transferring the program from
LOGO!Soft Comfort to LOGO!, you can edit the elements connected to the data log block.
For a detailed description of configuration of the data log function in LOGO!Soft Comfort,
refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort. From the LOGO! Base Module, you can
only configure elements connected to the data log block.
Editing elements connected to the data log block

If your circuit program in LOGO! contains a data log block configured from LOGO!Soft
Comfort, you can edit elements connected to this data log as follows:
1. Switch to programming mode. Press OK twice to step into the following display of your
circuit program:
2. Move the cursor to "L1" by pressing (The data log is identified with a "L1"). Press OK.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 261
Data log
3. Press OK on the selected input ("M1" in this example) and the cursor appears in a
flashing solid square. To select a different element from the available list (for example,
B3), press . Press OK. LOGO! shows the following display:
4. In the following example, you can see that this "L1" is now connected to the B3 block:
Note
LOGO! 0BA8 provides a 1024-byte buffer for data logging. If the data in this buffer
reaches 512 bytes, LOGO! automatically writes data to the micro SD card inserted in the
card slot. If the speed of data generation in LOGO! 0BA8 is faster than that of data writing
to the micro SD card, data loss can occur. To avoid the occurrence of data loss, apply an
enable signal to the data log function block at a minimum time interval of 500 ms. If,
however, no micro SD card is inserted in the card slot, the buffer area in LOGO! 0BA8
can only store 512 bytes of data log and the left data log gets lost.
A micro SD card can store a maximum of 50 data log files for each LOGO! Base Module.
If you insert the same card into another LOGO! Base Module, it can store another 50 data
log files for the current LOGO! Base Module, but the maximum number of lines that a
card can store is limited to its memory size. A data log file on the micro SD card can store
a maximum of 20000 lines. If the memory of the micro SD card is full and you want to
create a new data file, then an error message will be generated automatically.
LOGO! automatically creates file names with the format of "<XYZ>_<number>.csv".
<XYZ> stands for the last part of the four-part IP address code of the connected LOGO!
Base Module. It ranges from one digit to three digits. <number> indicates the sequential
number of the created data file and ranges from 1 to 50. Do not change the file name
because the LOGO! Base Module cannot recognize user-defined names.
You can only upload the most recent data log file on the micro SD card from LOGO! to
LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Under the following circumstances, LOGO! creates a new data log file:
• When the circuit program in LOGO! is changed
• When the number of lines in the data log file exceeds 20000
The created file will have a name with an increased number index, for example, if the
name for the current data file is "135_1.csv", the new file will be named "135_2.csv".
LOGO!
262 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Configuring LOGO! 8
Parameter assignment refers to the configuration of the block parameters. You can set delay
times for time functions, the switching times of timers, counter threshold values, the
monitoring interval of an hours counter, the on and off thresholds of the trigger, and more.
You can configure the parameters:
● In programming mode
● In parameter assignment mode
Parameter assignment mode allows the editing of parameters without having to modify the
circuit program. This feature is available so that you can edit parameters without having to
change to programming mode. The advantage is that you can edit program parameters, but
the circuit program remains protected.
Note
In parameter assignment mode, LOGO! continues execution of the circuit program.
8.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode

Press ESC to access the parameter assignment mode:
For more information about the menu commands in parameter assignment mode, refer to
Section "LOGO! Basic (Page 331)".
Follow these steps to stop your circuit program and thus change to the main menu of
programming mode:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 263
Configuring LOGO!
3. Move the cursor to "②": Press
4. Confirm placing LOGO! in STOP mode by pressing OK with the cursor on "②".
LOGO! shows the main menu of the programming mode:
For more information about switching LOGO! to RUN mode, refer to Section "Switching
LOGO! to RUN mode (Page 81)".
Description of other menu commands of the parameter assignment menu
● Menu command ①
For information on the various settings, refer to the following topics:
– Parameters (Page 265)
– Selecting the parameters (Page 266)
– Modifying parameters (Page 267)
– Assigning a circuit program name (Page 76)
● Menu command ②
For information on the various settings, refer to the following topics:
– Setting the time of day and date (Page 270)
– Summertime/wintertime conversion (Page 98)
– Synchronization (Page 101)
– Setting the start screen (Page 275)
– Setting the display contrast and backlight choice (Page 271)
– Setting the default values for LOGO! (Page 269)
LOGO!
264 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Configuring LOGO!
● Menu command ③
For information on the various settings, refer to the topic "Configuring network settings
(Page 104)".
● Menu command ④
For information on the various settings, refer to the topic "Diagnosing errors from LOGO!
(Page 110)".
8.1.1 Parameters
Note
You can only view and edit parameters in the parameter assignment mode when they have
the read/write ("+") designation. See the "Parameter protection (Page 133)" topic and the
"Synchronization (Page 101)" topic.
Parameters are, for example:

● The delay times of a timer relay
● The switching times (cams) of a timer switch
● Counter thresholds
● The monitoring time for hour counters
● The trigger thresholds
A block number (Bx) and the short name of the parameter identifies each parameter.
Examples:
● T: ...is a configurable time
● MI: ...is a configurable time interval
Note
LOGO!Soft Comfort also allows you to assign names to blocks (for more information, refer to
the chapter entitled "LOGO! Software (Page 291)".
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 265
Configuring LOGO!
8.1.2 Selecting the parameters

To select a parameter:
1. On the parameter assignment menu, move the cursor to "①": Press or
2. Confirm "①" with OK.

4. Confirm "②" with OK.

LOGO! shows the list of all available blocks, for example:
If no parameter can be set, the display shows as follows, and you can press ESC to
return to the parameter assignment menu.
5. Press or to move the cursor to the block that you desire to change its parameter,
and confirm with OK.
6. Now, select the desired parameter: Press or

7. Select the parameter you want to edit, and press OK.
LOGO!
266 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Configuring LOGO!
8.1.3 Modifying parameters

You first select the parameter you want to edit (Page 266).
You change the value of the parameter in the same way as you did in programming mode:
1. Move the cursor to the point at which you want to make the change: Press or
2. To change this value: Press or
3. To apply the value: OK
Note
When changing the time parameter when the system is in RUN, you can also change the
timebase (s=seconds, m=minutes, h=hours). This does not apply if the time parameter
represents the result of another function (for an example, see the "On-delay (Page 141)"
topic). In this case you can neither change the value nor the timebase. The current time is
reset to zero when you change the timebase.
Current value of a time T

View of a time T in parameter assignment mode:
You can change the configured time T.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 267
Configuring LOGO!
Current timer value

View of a timer cam in parameter assignment mode:
You can change the on/off times and the day.
Current value of a counter

View of a counter parameter in parameter assignment mode:
You can change the on/off threshold. This does not apply if the on or off threshold represents
the result of another function (In the "Up/down counter (Page 178)" topic, this is B021).
Current value of an hour counter

View of an hour counter parameter in parameter assignment mode:
You can edit the configured time interval MI.
LOGO!
268 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Configuring LOGO!
8.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!
Current value of a threshold trigger

View of the parameter of a threshold trigger in parameter assignment mode:
You can change the on/off threshold.

You can set the following default values for a LOGO! Basic:
Clock settings
You can set the default values for time-of-day and date (Page 270) , summertime/wintertime
conversion (Page 98) and synchronization (Page 101) in programming mode or parameter
assignment mode through the following menu commands:
Contrast and backlight settings

You can set the default value for the backlight (Page 271) and the default value for the
display contrast (Page 271) in programming mode or parameter assignment mode through
the following menu commands:
Menu language
You can set the language (Page 274) in which LOGO! displays the menus in programming
mode through the following menu commands:
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 269
Configuring LOGO!
Number of Base Module analog inputs

The LOGO! Base Modules LOGO! 24CE, LOGO! 24CEo, LOGO! 12/24RCE, and LOGO!
12/24RCEo support four analog inputs. Formerly they supported two. You can choose
whether to use two or four analog inputs (Page 275) on these modules in programming
mode through the following menu commands:
Start screen settings

You can select the default setting for the start screen (Page 275) that displays on LOGO!
when LOGO! transfers to RUN mode in programming mode or parameter assignment mode
through the following menu commands:
Message text settings

You can select settings that apply to all message text function blocks (Page 204) in
programming mode or parameter assignment mode through the following menu commands:
8.2.1 Setting the time of day and date

You can set the time of day and the date in programming mode or parameter assignment
mode.
Setting the time of day and the date in parameter assignment mode
Follow these steps to set the time of day and the date:
1. Select parameter assignment mode (Page 263).
LOGO!
270 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Configuring LOGO!


LOGO! shows the following display.
8. To set the correct time of day, press or to move the cursor to the desired position,
and press or to change the value.
9. To set the correct date, press or to move the cursor to the desired position, and
press or to change the value.
10.To confirm your entries: Press OK
Setting the time of day and the date in programming mode

If you want to set the time of day and the date in programming mode, select "①" in the main
menu, then menus "②" and "③". You can now set the date and the time as described
earlier.
8.2.2 Setting the display contrast and backlight choice

You can set the default value for the display contrast and backlight in programming mode or
parameter assignment mode.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 271
Configuring LOGO!
Setting the display contrast in parameter assignment mode

Follow these steps to set the display contrast:



8. To change the display contrast: Press or

9. To confirm your entry: Press OK
Setting the display contrast in programming mode

If you want to set the display contrast in programming mode, select menu command "①" in
the main menu, then menus "②" and "③". You can now set the display contrast as
described earlier.
LOGO!
272 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Configuring LOGO!
Setting the backlight choice in parameter assignment mode

Follow these steps to set the backlight choice:


6. Select "③": Press or

8. Move the cursor to "④" or "⑤": Press or

9. Confirm "④" or "⑤": Press OK
The default setting is that the backlight is not on. To set the backlight to always be on,
select "⑤".
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 273
Configuring LOGO!
Setting the backlight choice in programming mode

If you want to set the backlight in programming mode, select menu command "①" in the
main menu, then menus "②" and "③". You can now set the backlight as described earlier.
Note
The backlight lifetime of the LOGO! TDE is 20000 hours.
You can change the backlight colors of the LOGO! onboard display or the LOGO! TDE by
means of some special flags (M25, M26, M28 to M31). For more information, refer to section
"Constants and connectors (Page 119)". If you use these special flags in your circuit
programs, the backlight setting through the above menu commands takes no effect.
8.2.3 Setting the menu language

The language of the LOGO! menus can be one of ten predefined languages:
German English French Spanish Italian

Chinese Dutch Turkish Russian Japanese
Setting the menu language in programming mode

You can set the menu language in programming mode only:
1. In the main menu of programming mode, move the cursor to "①": Press or

LOGO!
274 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Configuring LOGO!
5. Move the cursor to the language of your choice: Press or

6. Confirm language selection: Press OK
8.2.4 Setting the number of AIs in LOGO!

LOGO! 12/24RCE/RCEo and LOGO! 24CE/24CEo support up to four onboard inputs that
can be used as either digital or analog inputs (0 V to 10V). Inputs I7 (AI1) and I8 (AI2) are
available as analog inputs by default, whether you use them or not. Inputs I1 (AI3) and I2
(AI4) are optional analog inputs. LOGO! provides a menu where you can choose to use two
analog inputs (the default, AI1 and AI2), or four, or even zero. Regardless of the settings,
inputs I1 and I2 can be used as digital inputs. To use them as analog inputs AI3 and AI4, you
must set the number of analog inputs to four. Note that the number of configured analog
inputs on LOGO! affects the subsequent numbering of analog inputs on attached expansion
modules (see the "Maximum setup (Page 29)" topic).
You can set the number of AIs in programming mode only.
Setting the number of AIs in programming mode

Follow these steps to set the number of analog inputs:
1. In the main menu of programming mode, select "①": Press or


5. Move to "0 AI", "2 AIs" or "4 AIs": Press or
6. Confirm your selection with OK, and the setting takes effect immediately.
8.2.5 Setting the start screen

You can select the default setting for the start screen that LOGO! displays in RUN mode.
You make this selection from LOGO! in either parameter assignment mode or programming
mode.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 275
Configuring LOGO!
Selecting the start screen in parameter assignment mode

Follow these steps to select the start screen for LOGO!:


The current setting of the start screen is indicated by the circle with a dot. The default
setting is "③".
You can choose to display the current time-of-day and date (③), the values of the digital
inputs (④), or the parameter assignment menu (⑤).
6. Select the desired default setting: Press or
7. To confirm your entry: Press OK
Power LOGO! off then on to make your changes take effect. When LOGO! is in RUN mode,
it displays the start screen that you selected.
LOGO!
276 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Using memory cards 9
LOGO! supports only micro SD cards that support FAT32 file system format for program
storage. You can store and copy-protect a circuit program, with or without the data log of
process data, from a LOGO! device to a micro SD card, or copy a circuit program from the
card to a LOGO! device.
LOGO! allows you to store only one circuit program in its memory. If you want to modify the
circuit program or create an additional one without deleting the first, you must archive it
somewhere.
For detailed information about how to format micro SD cards, see Section "Formatting micro
SD cards (Page 277)".
For detailed information about the copy protection function, see Section "Program copy
protection (Page 289)".
For detailed information about the data log, see Chapter "Data log (Page 261)".
Upward compatibility of circuit programs

You can transfer circuit programs written for the previous versions 0BA0...0BA7 to 0BA8
devices from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
9.1 Formatting micro SD cards

As LOGO! 0BA8 only supports micro SD cards that support FAT32 file system format for
program storage, you must format the micro SD card first if it supports other file systems.
The following examples describe how to format a micro SD card under operating systems
Windows 7, Linux Suse® and Mac OS ® respectively.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 277
Using memory cards
Formatting under Windows OS

Follow the steps below to format the micro SD card under Windows OS:
1.
2.
LOGO!
278 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Using memory cards
3.
4.
Formatting under Linux OS

1. Open the following terminal in the application browser to enter commands:
2. Enter the first command "fdisk -1" in the terminal to search for the removable device block
name and "/dev/sdc1" is found.
3. Enter "sudo umount /dev/sdc1" to umount this device.
4. Enter "sudo mkfs.vfat -f 32 /dev/sdc1" and formatting is completed.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 279
Using memory cards
Formatting under Mac OS

Follow the steps below to format the micro SD card under MAC OS:
1.
2.
LOGO!
280 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Using memory cards
9.2 Inserting and removing the card from LOGO!
3.
4.

When you remove a micro SD card that contains a circuit program with copy protection
attributes, note the following: LOGO! can only execute the circuit program stored on the card
if the card remains inserted during system runtime.
A removal of the card during RUN mode can lead to impermissible operating states.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 281
Using memory cards
Removing the micro SD card

To remove the micro SD card, carefully insert a screwdriver with a 3-mm blade into the
groove on the front of the socket, and lever the socket partially out of the slot. Press the two
sides of the socket and pull it out. You can now remove the micro SD card from the socket.
Inserting the micro SD card

The entry of the card slot is chamfered on its bottom right. The edge of the cards is
chamfered accordingly. This encoding prevents you from inserting cards in the wrong way.
Insert the card into the socket, insert the socket into the slot and push it in until it engages.
Note
Make sure that you insert the card into the right position in the socket until you hear an
audible sound of a click.
LOGO!
282 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Using memory cards
9.3 Copying data from LOGO! to the card
9.3 Copying data from LOGO! to the card
Copying data from LOGO! to the card manually

To manually copy the circuit program to the micro SD card, follow the steps shown in the
illustration below:
Press OK. LOGO! starts copying the circuit program to the card.
If power fails while LOGO! is copying the circuit program, repeat the process after power-on.
Note
• If the program is empty, a message will display on the screen to remind you the program
in LOGO! is empty.
• The password of a protected circuit program in LOGO! also applies to the copied program
version on your card.
Copying data from LOGO! to the card automatically

LOGO!Soft Comfort provides an option for automatically copying the circuit program to the
micro SD card when transferring the circuit program to LOGO!. This option is available in the
dialog for PC->LOGO! transfer. If you select this option, LOGO!Soft Comfort transfers the
circuit program to LOGO! and to the micro SD card.
Note
To successfully copy the circuit program from LOGO! to the micro SD card, make sure that
the free memory space available on the micro SD card is at least 100 Kbytes.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 283
Using memory cards
9.4 Copying data from the card to LOGO!
Generating the data log on the micro SD card

If your circuit program in LOGO! includes a Data Log function block configured from
LOGO!Soft Comfort, you can save the data log in your LOGO! or on the micro SD card. If
there is a micro SD card inserted into the slot of your LOGO!, then when LOGO! switches
from STOP to RUN, it attempts to copy the data log to the micro SD card; otherwise, LOGO!
saves the data log in memory. At every STOP to RUN transition, LOGO! determines the
destination of the data log storage.
If LOGO! copies the data log to the micro SD card, it saves the data log by default as .CSV
file format, which you can then open from a PC. Each line in the .CSV file includes a time
stamp, the function block number and the actual values recorded. For more information
about the data log, refer to Chapter "Data log (Page 261)".
Note
When LOGO! with an inserted micro SD card is in STOP mode, you can upload the most
recent data log file on the micro SD card to LOGO!Soft Comfort using a transfer menu
command in LOGO!Soft Comfort. For more information about the data log uploading
command, refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.

You can copy a circuit program from a micro SD card to LOGO! in one of the following ways:
● Automatically during the startup of LOGO! (POWER ON)
● By means of the card specific menu of LOGO!
Note
If the program on the card is protected with a password, the copied program in LOGO! is
also protected with the same password. For more information about the Card menu, refer to
Section "Overview of LOGO! menus (Page 68)".
Automatic copying during the startup of LOGO!

To automatically copy the circuit program to the card, follow these steps:
1. Switch off the power supply to LOGO!.
2. Insert the card into the relevant slot.
LOGO!
284 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Using memory cards
3. Switch on the power supply to LOGO!.

LOGO! copies the program from the program module/card to LOGO!. When LOGO!
finishes copying, it opens the LOGO! main menu:
Note
Before you switch LOGO! to RUN, you must ensure that the system you are controlling
with LOGO! does not represent a source of hazard.
4. Move the cursor to the first menu command in Step 3: Press or .

5. Press OK.
Copying by means of the card specific menu

For more information about the replacement of a micro SD card, refer to Section "Inserting
and removing the card from LOGO! (Page 281)".
To copy a program from the card to LOGO!, insert the card and follow the steps shown in the
illustration below:
Press OK. LOGO! copies the circuit program from the card to LOGO!. When LOGO! has
finished copying, it automatically returns to the LOGO! main menu.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 285
Using memory cards
LOGO!
286 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Security 10
Overview
This chapter describes the following security functions for improved protection on LOGO!:
Security function Description

Network access security You can protect your devices from network security risks by
deploying the LOGO! devices and SIMATIC S7 devices on
the Intranet.
Program access security The following protection methods can help you protect your
circuit programs from unauthorized access:
• Password protection
• Copy protection
Menu access security You can limit access to specific menus of LOGO! by setting
the access level.
10.1 Network access security

With the enhanced Ethernet function of LOGO! 0BA8 devices, you can access the LOGO!
Base Modules through LOGO!Soft Comfort, the Web server, or other compatible devices
with Ethernet interfaces. In this case, both Internet and Intranet communication is possible
for the LOGO! 0BA8 devices.
● For Internet communication, accessing the LOGO! Base Module requires a valid user
password to ensure network security. You can set or change the password from
LOGO!Soft Comfort only. For more information about setting the user password, refer to
the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
● For Intranet communication, you can access the LOGO! Base Module directly with no
password required.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 287
Security
10.1 Network access security
Siemens strongly recommends that you do not put the LOGO! devices (LOGO! Base
Modules and the LOGO! TDE) and the SIMATIC S7 devices directly on the Internet, but hide
them behind a firewall (see illustration below). In addition, make sure you select TCP port
8080 and block all other ports in the firewall configuration; otherwise, there may be network
security risks, for example, data leakage, virus invasion and hacker attack.
WARNING
Death, severe personal injury and/or property damage from unauthorized access to LOGO!
from the Web server
You can set from LOGO!Soft Comfort to enable remote access to LOGO! from the Web
server. This allows you to perform program/variable changes from the Web server.
Unauthorized access to LOGO! from the Web server could disrupt process operation and
could result in death, severe personal injury and/or property damage.
Siemens recommends that you observe the following security practices:
• Password-protect Web server access to LOGO! with a strong password. Strong
passwords are at least eight characters in length, mix letters, numbers, and special
characters, are not words that can be found in a dictionary, and are not names or
identifiers that can be derived from personal information. Keep the password secret and
change it frequently.
• Perform error-checking and range-checking on your variables in your program logic.
Note
To protect your devices, you must make sure your Intranet is secure; otherwise, your
devices may still be subject to network security risks.
LOGO!
288 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Security
10.2 Program access security
10.2 Program access security
10.2.1 Program password protection

You can protect your circuit program from unauthorized access with a password. Siemens
strongly recommends you use the password-protection to prevent unauthorized reading or
editing of your circuit programs.
For more information about assigning and changing a program password, refer to Section
"Password for circuit program protection (Page 77)".
10.2.2 Program copy protection

The Copy Protect function provides protection for the circuit programs on micro SD cards. A
circuit program is protected when you transfer it to a protected memory card.
This additional security feature allows you to bind the circuit program with a specific memory
card. If you copy a protected circuit program to another memory card, LOGO! cannot
recognize the program and reject loading it after you insert the card.
To execute this circuit program in LOGO!, you must leave the card in the LOGO! Base
Module during RUN mode; that is, you cannot remove the card to copy the program to other
LOGO! devices.
A circuit program with password protection is no longer protected after the correct password
has been entered; that is, you can then edit or copy the program and remove the card.
Correlation between the password and the protection function
Password Protection Editing Copying Deleting

- - Yes Yes Yes
Yes - Yes, with password Yes Yes
- Yes No No Yes
Yes Yes Yes, with password Yes, with password Yes
Enabling the protection function

To assign the copy protection function to the card, follow these steps:
1. Enter the programming mode and move the cursor to "①": Press or
2. Confirm "①" with OK.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 289
Security
10.3 Menu access security
4. Confirm "②" with OK.

By default, the card is unprotected.

6. Confirm your selection by pressing OK.
Note
The protection function applies only to the card; you must copy (Page 283) the circuit
program to the card in a separate action at power-on.
You can always change the status of protection function disabled to protection function
enabled.
A status change from protection function enabled to protection function disabled is only
possible if the card does not contain a circuit program.
10.3 Menu access security

LOGO! provides two access levels, administrator and operator, to limit access to specific
menus in programming mode.You can change LOGO!'s access level from administrator to
operator or from operator to administrator. For more information about switching between the
access levels, refer to Section "Configuring menu access protection for LOGO! (Page 65)".
LOGO!
290 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! software 11
11.1 LOGO! software
LOGO!Soft Comfort is available as a programming package for the PC. This software
provides many features, for example:
● A graphical user interface for offline creation of your circuit program by means of Ladder
Diagram (contact chart / circuit diagram) or Function Block Diagram (function chart)
● Simulation of your circuit program on the PC
● Generating and printing of an overview chart for the circuit program
● Saving a backup of the circuit program on the hard drive or other media
● Comparing circuit programs
● Easy configuration of blocks
● Transferring the circuit program in both directions:
– from LOGO! to the PC
– from the PC to LOGO!
● Reading the values of the hour counter
● Setting the time of day
● Summertime/wintertime conversion
● Online testing that provides a display of status changes and process variables of LOGO!
in RUN mode:
– Status of digital I/O, flags, shift register bits and cursor keys
– Values of all analog I/O and flags
– Results of all blocks
– Current values (including the times) of selected blocks
● Starting and stopping circuit program execution from the PC (switching between RUN and
STOP modes)
● Network communication
● Creating UDF blocks (Page 257) for use in a circuit program
● Configuring the Data Log (Page 261) function block for your circuit program to record
process values of the configured function blocks
The current version is LOGO!Soft Comfort V8.0. The Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort
describes all of the programming functionality and design features.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 291
LOGO! software
11.1 LOGO! software
The LOGO! advantages

As you can see, LOGO!Soft Comfort offers many advantages:
● You can develop the circuit program on your PC.
● You simulate the circuit program on your computer and verify its functions before you
actually implement it in your system.
● You can add comments to the circuit program and create hard copies.
● You can save a copy of your circuit program to the file system on your PC, to make it
directly available for modifications.
● It takes only a few key actions to download the circuit program to LOGO!.
Supported operating systems

You can execute LOGO!Soft Comfort on any of the following operating systems:
● 32 bit/64 bit Windows 7, Windows 8 or Windows XP
● 32 bit/64 bit SUSE Linux 11.3 SP3, kernel 3.0.76
● Mac OS × 10.6 Snow Leopard, Mac OS × Lion, Mac OS × MOUNTAIN LION and Mac
OS × Mavericks
Upgrading previous LOGO!Soft Comfort versions

You can use the following menu command in LOGO!Soft Comfort V8.0 to upgrade
LOGO!Soft Comfort V1.0, V2.0, V3.0, V4.0, V5.0, V6.0, or V7.0 to V8.0.
You can find order numbers in Section "Order numbers (Page 345)".
To upgrade from an old version to a new version, follow these steps:
1. Install the new software from the DVD.
2. When the system prompts you for the previous version, place the old LOGO!Soft Comfort
DVD in the DVD drive.
3. Point your browser to the "...\Application" directory on the DVD.
Updates and information

You can download demo versions of the software free of charge from the Internet address
specified in the preface (Page 3).
For detailed information on updates, upgrades and the LOGO!Soft Comfort Update Center,
refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
LOGO!
292 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! software
11.2 Connecting LOGO! to a PC
Connecting LOGO! to a PC
LOGO! 0BA8 has an Ethernet port so you can connect a LOGO! 0BA8 Base Module to a PC
with an Ethernet cable.
Switching LOGO! to PC ↔ LOGO! mode

Two methods are available to switch LOGO! to STOP mode:
● Switch LOGO! to STOP mode from your PC (refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft
Comfort).
● Select the following menu command on a device with display.
Confirm your selection with "①":
When LOGO! is in STOP mode and online with the PC, the following PC commands are
available:
● Switch LOGO! to RUN
● Read/write the circuit program
● Read/write the summertime/wintertime
Note
For more information on LOGO! versions without display, refer to the Appendix topic "LOGO!
without display ("LOGO! Pure") (Page 329)".
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 293
LOGO! software
Closing the PC ↔ LOGO! mode

When LOGO! completes the data transfer, it shuts down the connection to the PC.
Note
If you have password-protected the program that you created in LOGO!Soft Comfort, LOGO!
receives both the circuit program and the password during the download.
The upload of a password-protected program created in LOGO! is possible only after you
enter the correct password in LOGO!Soft Comfort.
LOGO!
294 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Applications 12
Note
LOGO! sample applications are available to all our customers free of charge on the Siemens
LOGO! website (http://www.siemens.com/logo) (go to Products & Solutions → Applications →
Application Examples).
Siemens does not guarantee that the provided examples are error-free; they serve as
general information about the fields of application for LOGO!, and can be different from user-
specific solutions. Siemens reserves the right to make changes.
You are responsible for the operation of your system.. For safety concerns, refer to the
relevant national standards and system-related installation regulations.
On the Internet you can find the following sample applications, tips for further applications,
and more:
● Irrigation system for greenhouse plants
● Conveyor control system
● Bending machine control system
● Shop window lighting
● Bell system (for example, in a school)
● Parking lot surveillance
● Outdoor lighting
● Shutter control system
● Domestic outdoor and indoor lighting system
● Control system of a cream stirrer
● Sports hall lighting
● Constant load on three consumers
● Sequential control system for cable-welding machines for large cross–sections
● Step switch (for example, for fans)
● Sequential control for boilers
● Control system for several pump sets with centralized operator control
● Cutting device (for example, for detonating fuses)
● Monitoring periods of utilization, for example of a solar energy system
● Intelligent foot switches, for example, for speed preselection)
● Elevating platform controls
● Impregnation of textiles, heating and conveyor belt controls
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 295
Applications
● Silo-filling system
● Fill station with message text on the LOGO! TDE that displays the sum of counted objects
On the Web you can also find descriptions and the corresponding circuit diagrams of the
applications. You can read these *.pdf files with the Adobe Acrobat Reader. If you have
installed LOGO!Soft Comfort on your computer, you can simply click the disk icon to
download the relevant circuit programs, which you can then adapt to suit your application
and download to LOGO! directly via the PC cable.
Benefits of LOGO!
LOGO! is a particularly useful feature:
● For replacing auxiliary switchgear with the integrated LOGO! functions
● For saving wiring and installation work - because LOGO! keeps the wiring "in its head."
● For reducing space requirements for components in the control cabinet/distribution box. A
smaller control cabinet/distribution box may provide sufficient space.
● For adding or changing functions, without having to install additional switchgear or
change the wiring.
● For offering your customers new, additional functions for domestic and commercial
housing installations. Examples:
– Domestic security systems: LOGO! switches on a lamp at regular intervals or opens
and closes the shutters while you are on holiday.
– Central heating: LOGO! runs the circulation pump only when water or heating is
actually required.
– Refrigerating systems: LOGO! can defrost refrigerating systems at regular intervals to
save energy costs.
– You can illuminate aquaria and terraria on a time-dependent basis.
Last but not least, you can:
● Use commonly available switches and pushbuttons, which makes it easy to install a
domestic system.
● Connect LOGO! directly to your domestic installation; the integrated power supply makes
it possible.
Do you want more information?

For more information about LOGO!, see the Siemens Web page (As mentioned in the first
paragraph of the Note in this chapter).
Do you have any suggestions?

There are definitely many more useful applications for LOGO!. If you know of one, please
write to the following address or send it to the online Support Request
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request). Siemens will collect all the
suggestions made and distribute as many of them as possible. Your suggestions are
valuable to Siemens.
LOGO!
296 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Applications
Write to:
Siemens AG
A&D AS FA PS4
PO box 48 48
D-90327 Nuremberg
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 297
Applications
LOGO!
298 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data A
A.1 General technical data
Criterion Tested in accordance with Values

LOGO! Base Modules (0BA8)
LOGO! Basic
Dimensions (WxHxD) 71.5 x 90 x 60 mm
Weight
• Modules with relay output Approx. 240 g
• Modules with transistor output Approx. 195 g
Installation On a 35 mm profile rail four
module widths or wall mounting
LOGO! Pure
71.5 x 90 x 58 mm
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
Approx. 160 g
• Modules with transistor output
On a 35 mm profile rail four
Installation module widths or wall mounting
LOGO! expansion modules DM16...
Weight
On a 35 mm profile rail four
Installation
LOGO! expansion modules
DM8...
Weight
On a 35 mm profile rail two
Installation
LOGO! expansion modules
AM...
Weight Approx. 95 g
Installation On a 35 mm profile rail two
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 299
Technical data
A.1 General technical data

LOGO! TDE (Text Display with Ether-
net interfaces)
Dimensions (WxHxD) 128.2 x 86 x 38.7 mm
Weight Approx. 220 g
Installation Bracket mounting
Climatic conditions
Ambient temperature Low temperature to IEC
60068-2-1 0 °C to 55 °C
• Horizontal installation
High temperature to IEC 0 °C to 55 °C
• Vertical installation
60068-2-2
Storage/shipping - 40 °C to +70 °C
Relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 From 10% to 95% no conden-
sation
Air pressure 795 hPa to 1080 hPa
Pollutants IEC 60068-2-42 SO2 10 cm3/m3, 21 days
IEC 60068-2-43 H2S 1 cm3/m3, 21 days
Ambient mechanical conditions
Degree of protection IP20 for LOGO! Base Modules,
expansion modules, and the
LOGO! TDE excluding the TDE
front panel
IP65 for LOGO! TDE front pan-
el
Vibrations: IEC 60068-2-6 5 Hz to 8.4 Hz
(constant amplitude 3.5 mm)
8.4 Hz to 150 Hz
(constant acceleration 1 g)
Shock IEC 60068-2-27 18 shocks
(half-sine wave 15 g/11 ms)
Free fall (packaged) IEC 60068-2-32 0.3 m
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Noise emission EN 55011/A Limit class B group 1
EN 55022/B
EN 50081-1
(domestic area)
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 8 kV air discharge
Severity 3 6 kV contact discharge
Electromagnetic fields IEC 61000-4-3 Field strength 1 V/m and 10
V/m
HF currents on cables and cable IEC 61000-4-6 10 V
shielding
Burst pulses IEC 61000-4-4Severity 3 2 kV (supply and digital signal
lines), 1 kV (analog signal lines)
High-energy surge pulse (applies only IEC 61000-4-5Severity 3 1 kV (power lines) symmetrical
to LOGO! 230 ...) 2 kV (power lines) asymmetrical
Safety to IEC
LOGO!
300 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data
A.2 Technical data: LOGO! 230...

Clearance and creepage distance IEC 60664, IEC 61131-2, Fulfilled
rating EN 50178
cULus to UL 508, CSA
C22.2 No. 142
Insulation strength IEC 61131-2 Fulfilled
Cycle time
Cycle time per function < 0.1 ms
Startup
Startup time at power-up Typ. 9 s
S7 communication
Delay time Max. 100 ms
LOGO! 230RCEo LOGO! 230RCE

Power supply
Input voltage 115 VAC/VDC to 115 VAC/VDC to
240 VAC/VDC 240 VAC/VDC
Permissible range 85 VAC to 265 VAC 85 VAC to 265 VAC
100 VDC to 253 VDC 100 VDC to 253 VDC
Permissible mains frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Power consumption
• 115 VAC • 15 mA to 40 mA • 15 mA to 40 mA
• 115 VDC • 5 mA to 10 mA • 5 mA to 10 mA
Voltage failure buffering
• 115 VAC/VDC • Typ. 10 ms • Typ. 10 ms
Power loss at
• 115 VAC • 1.7 W to 4.6 W • 1.7 W to 4.6 W
• 240 VAC • 3.6 W to 6.0 W • 3.6 W to 6.0 W
• 115 VDC • 0.6 W to 1.2 W • 0.6 W to 1.2 W
• 240 VDC • 0.5 W to 2.0 W • 0.5 W to 2.0 W
Backup of the real-time clock at Typ. 20 days Typ. 20 days
25 °C
Accuracy of the real-time clock Typ. ± 2 s/day Typ. ± 2 s/day
Digital inputs
Number 8 8
Electrical isolation No No
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 301
Technical data

Number of high speed inputs 0 0
Input frequency
• Normal input • Max. 4 Hz • Max. 4 Hz
• High speed input • -- • --
Max. continuous permissible volt- 265 VAC 265 VAC
age 253 VDC 253 VDC
Input voltage L1
• Signal 0 • < 40 VAC • < 40 VAC
• Signal 1 • > 79 VAC • > 79 VAC
• Signal 0 • < 30 VDC • < 30 VDC
• Signal 1 • > 79 VDC • > 79 VDC
Input current at
• Signal 0 • < 0.05 mA AC • < 0.05 mA AC
• Signal 1 • > 0.08 mA AC • > 0.08 mA AC
• Signal 0 • < 0.06 mA DC • < 0.06 mA DC
• Signal 1 • > 0.13 mA DC • > 0.13 mA DC
Delay time at 0 to 1:
• 120 VAC • Typ. 40 ms • Typ. 40 ms
• 240 VAC • Typ. 30 ms • Typ. 30 ms
• 120 VDC • Typ. 25 ms • Typ. 25 ms
• 240 VDC • Typ. 20 ms • Typ. 20 ms
• 120 VAC • Typ. 45 ms • Typ. 45 ms
• 240 VAC • Typ. 70 ms • Typ. 70 ms
• 120 VDC • Typ. 60 ms • Typ. 60 ms
• 240 VDC • Typ. 75 ms • Typ. 75 ms
Line length (unshielded) max. 100 m max. 100 m
Digital outputs
Number 4 4
Output type Relay outputs Relay outputs
Electrical isolation Yes Yes
In groups of 1 1
Control of a digital input Yes Yes
Continuous current Ith Recommended range of appli- Recommended range of appli-
cation ≥ 100 mA at cation ≥ 100 mA at
Max. 10 A per relay Max. 10 A per relay
LOGO!
302 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data
A.3 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 230R and LOGO! DM16 230R

Surge current Max. 30 A Max. 30 A
Incandescent lamp load (25000
switching cycles) at
• 230/240 VAC • 1000 W • 1000 W
• 115/120 VAC • 500 W • 500 W
Fluorescent tubes with ballast 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
(25000 switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, conventionally 1 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 1 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
compensated (25000 switching
cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
Short circuit-proof cos 1 Power protection B16, 600 A Power protection B16, 600 A
Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7 Power protection B16, 900 A Power protection B16, 900 A
Derating None; across the entire tem- None; across the entire tem-
perature range perature range
Parallel output circuits for power Not permitted Not permitted
increase
Protection of output relay (if de- Max. 16 A, characteristic B16 Max. 16 A, characteristic B16
sired)
Switching rate
Mechanical 10 Hz 10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load 2 Hz 2 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz
Notice: For fluorescent lamps with capacitors, you must consider the technical data of
fluorescent lamp ballasts. If the current exceeds the maximum allowed surge current,
appropriate contactor relays must switch the flourescent lamps.
The data was determined with the following devices:
● Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 uncompensated.
● Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 parallel compensated with 7 μF.
● Siemens fluorescent tubes 58 W VVG 5LZ 501 1-1N with ballast.
LOGO! DM8 230R LOGO! DM16 230R

Power supply
Input voltage 115 VAC/VDC to 240 VAC/VDC 115 VAC/VDC to 240 VAC/VDC
Permissible range 85 VAC to 265 VAC 85 VAC to 265 VAC
100 VDC to 253 VDC 100 VDC to 253 VDC
Permissible mains frequency 47Hz to 63 Hz
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 303
Technical data

Power consumption
Power loss at
• 115 VAC • 1.1 W to 3.5 W • 1.1 W to 4.5 W
• 240 VAC • 2.4 W to 4.8 W • 2.4 W to 5.5 W
• 115 VDC • 0.5 W to 1.8 W • 0.6 W to 2.9 W
• 240 VDC • 1.2 W to 2.4 W • 1.2 W to 4.8 W
Digital inputs
Number 4 8
Input frequency
Max. continuous permissible 265 VAC 265 VAC
voltage 253 VDC 253 VDC
Input voltage L1
• Signal 0 • < 40 VAC • < 40 VAC
• Signal 1 • > 79 VAC • > 79 VAC
• Signal 0 • < 30 VDC • < 30 VDC
• Signal 1 • > 79 VDC • > 79 VDC
Input current at
• Signal 0 • < 0.05 mA AC • < 0.05 mA AC
• Signal 1 • > 0.08 mA AC • > 0.08 mA AC
• Signal 0 • < 0.06 mA DC • < 0.06 mA DC
• Signal 1 • > 0.13 mA DC • > 0.13 mA DC
LOGO!
304 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data

• 120 VAC • Typ. 40 ms • Typ. 40 ms
• 240 VAC • Typ. 30 ms • Typ. 30 ms
• 120 VDC • Typ. 25 ms • Typ. 25 ms
• 240 VDC • Typ. 20 ms • Typ. 20 ms
• 120 VAC • Typ. 45 ms • Typ. 45 ms
• 240 VAC • Typ. 70 ms • Typ. 70 ms
• 120 VDC • Typ. 60 ms • Typ. 60 ms
• 240 VDC • Typ. 75 ms • Typ. 75 ms
Line length (unshielded) Max. 100 m Max. 100 m
Digital outputs
Number 4 8
In groups of 1 1
Incandescent lamp load (25000
switching cycles) at:
230/240 VAC 1000 W 1000 W
115/120 VAC 500 W 500 W
Fluorescent tubes with ballast 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
Fluorescent tubes, convention- 1 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 1 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
ally compensated (25000
switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, uncompen- 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC) 10 x 58 W (at 230/240 VAC)
sated (25000 switching cycles)
Derating None; across the entire temper- None; across the entire temper-
ature range ature range
increase
Protection of output relay (if Max. 16 A, Max. 16 A,
desired) characteristic B16 characteristic B16
Switching rate
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 305
Technical data

LOGO! 24CE
LOGO! 24CEo
Power supply
Input voltage 24 VDC
Permissible range 20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Permissible mains frequency --
Power consumption from 24 VDC 15 mA to 50 mA (no load on digital output)
1.2 A (with max. load on digital output)
Voltage failure buffering --
Power loss at 24 VDC 0.4 W to 1.2 W
Backup of the real-time clock at 25 °C Typ. 20 days
Accuracy of the real-time clock Typ. ± 2 s/day
Digital inputs
Number 8
Electrical isolation No
Numbef of high speed inputs 4 (I3, I4, I5, I6)
Input frequency
• Normal input • Max. 4 Hz
• High speed input • Max. 5 kHz
Max. continuous permissible voltage 28.8 VDC
Input voltage L+
Signal 0 < 5 VDC
Signal 1 > 12 VDC
LOGO!
306 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data
LOGO! 24CE
LOGO! 24CEo
Input current at
Signal 0 < 0.9 mA (I3 to I6)
< 0.07 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)
Signal 1 > 2.1 mA (I3 to I6)
> 0.18 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)
Delay time at
0 to 1 • Typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 to I6)
1 to 0 • Typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 to I6)
Line length (unshielded) Max. 100 m
Analog inputs
Number 4 (I1=AI3, I2=AI4, I7=AI1, I8=AI2)
Range 0 VDC to 10 VDC
Input impedance 72 kΩ
Cycle time for analog value generation 300 ms
Line length (shielded and twisted) Max. 10 m
Error limit ± 1.5% at FS
Digital outputs
Number 4
Output type Transistor,
current-sourcing 1)
In groups of --
Control of a digital input Yes
Output voltage ≤ Supply voltage
Output current Max. 0.3 A per channel
Short circuit-proof and overload-proof Yes
Short circuit current limitation Approx. 1 A per channel
Derating None; across the entire temperature range
Short circuit-proof cos 1 --
Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7 --
Parallel output circuit for power increase Not permitted
Protection of output relay (if desired) --
Switching rate 2)
Mechanical --
Electrical 10 Hz
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 307
Technical data
A.5 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24 and LOGO! DM16 24
LOGO! 24CE
LOGO! 24CEo
Ohmic load/lamp load 10 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz
1) When you switch on LOGO! 24CE/24CEo, LOGO! DM8 24 or LOGO! DM16 24, the CPU sends
signal 1 to the digital outputs for about 50 μs. Take this into account, especially when using devic-
es that react to short pulses.
2) The maximum switching rate is only dependent on the switching program's cycle time.
A.5 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24 and LOGO! DM16 24
LOGO! DM8 24 LOGO! DM16 24

Power supply
Input voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC
Permissible range 20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC 20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Reverse polarity protection Yes Yes
Permissible mains frequency -- --
Power consumption from 15 mA to 40 mA (no load on 15 mA to 60 mA (no load on
24 VDC digital output) digital output)
1.2 A (with max. load on digital 2.4 A (with max. load on digital
output ) output )
Power loss at 24 V 0.4 W to 1.0 W 0.4 W to 1.5 W
Digital inputs
Number 4 8
Input frequency
Max. continuous permissible 28.8 VDC 28.8 VDC
voltage
Input voltage L+ L+
• Signal 0 • < 5 VDC • < 5 VDC
• Signal 1 • > 12 VDC • > 12 VDC
Input current at
• Signal 0 • < 0.88 mA • < 0.85 mA
• Signal 1 • > 2.1 mA • > 2 mA
Delay time at
• 0 to 1 • Typ. 1.5 ms • Typ. 1.5 ms
• 1 to 0 • Typ. 1.5 ms • Typ. 1.5 ms
LOGO!
308 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data
A.6 Technical data: LOGO! 24RC...
LOGO! DM8 24 LOGO! DM16 24

Digital outputs
Number 4 8
Output type Transistor, Transistor,
current-sourcing 1) current-sourcing 1)
In groups of -- --
Output voltage ≤ Supply voltage ≤ Supply voltage
Output current Max. 0.3 A per channel Max. 0.3 A per channel
Short circuit-proof and overload- Yes Yes
proof
Short circuit current limitation Approx. 1 A per channel Approx. 1 A per channel
Short circuit-proof cos 1 -- --
Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7 -- --
Parallel output circuit for power Not permitted Not permitted
increase
Protection of output relay (if -- --
desired)
Switching rate
Mechanical -- --
Electrical 10 Hz 10 Hz
1) When you switch on LOGO! 24CE/24CEo, LOGO! DM8 24 or LOGO! DM16 24, the CPU sends
signal 1 to the digital outputs for about 50 μs. Take this into account, especially when using devic-
es that react to short pulses.
LOGO! 24RCE
LOGO! 24RCEo
Power supply
Input voltage 24 VAC/VDC
Permissible range 20.4 VAC to 26.4 VAC
20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Reverse polarity protection --
Permissible mains frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 309
Technical data
LOGO! 24RCE
LOGO! 24RCEo
Power consumption
• 24 VAC • 15 mA to 150 mA
• 24 VDC • 15 mA to 130 mA
Voltage failure buffering Typ. 5 ms
Power loss
• 24 VAC • 0.4 W to 3.6 W
• 24 VDC • 0.4 W to 3.2 W
Backup of the real-time clock at 25 °C Typ. 20 days
Accuracy of the real-time clock Typ. ± 2 s/day
Digital inputs
Number 8, optional positive voltage or negative voltage
Number of high speed inputs 0
Input frequency
• Normal input • Max. 4 Hz
• High speed input • --
Max. continuous permissible voltage 26.4 VAC
28.8 VDC
Input voltage L
• Signal 0 • < 5 VAC/VDC
• Signal 1 • > 12 VAC/VDC
Input current at
• Signal 0 • < 1.2 mA
• Signal 1 • > 2.6 mA
Delay time at
• 0 to 1 • Typ. 1.5 ms
• 1 to 0 • Typ. 15 ms
Line length (unshielded) Max. 100 m
Analog inputs
Number --
Range --
max. Input voltage --
Digital outputs
Number 4
Output type Relay outputs
Electrical isolation Yes
In groups of 1
Control of a digital input Yes
LOGO!
310 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data
LOGO! 24RCE
LOGO! 24RCEo
Continuous current Ith Recommended range of application ≥ 100 mA at
12 VAC/VDC
Max. 10 A per relay
Surge current Max. 30 A
Incandescent lamp load (25000 switching 1000 W
cycles) at
Fluorescent tubes with ballast (25000 10 x 58 W
switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compen- 1 x 58 W
Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000 10 x 58 W
switching cycles)
Derating None; across the entire temperature range
Short circuit-proof cos 1 Power protection B16, 600 A
Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7 Power protection B16, 900 A
Parallel output circuits for power increase Not permitted
Protection of output relay Max. 16 A,
(if desired) characteristic B16
Switching rate
Mechanical 10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load 2 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz

Power supply
Input voltage 24 VAC/VDC 24 VDC
20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC 20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Reverse polarity protection -- Yes
Permissible mains frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz --
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 311
Technical data

Power consumption
• 24 VAC • 20 mA to 100 mA • --
Voltage failure buffering Typ. 5 ms Typ. 5 ms
Power loss
• 24 VAC • 0.5 W to 2.4 W • --
• 24 VDC • 0.2 W to 1.2 W • 0.35 W to 1.6 W
Digital inputs
Number 4, optional positive voltage or 8
negative voltage
Input frequency
Max. continuous permissible • 26.4 VAC • --
voltage
• 28.8 VDC • 28.8 VDC
Input voltage L
• Signal 0 • < 5 VAC/VDC • < 5 VDC
• Signal 1 • > 12 VAC/VDC • > 12 VDC
Input current at
• Signal 0 • < 1.1 mA • < 0.85 mA
• Signal 1 • > 2.63 mA • > 2.0 mA
Delay time at
• 0 to 1 • Typ. 1.5 ms • Typ. 1.5 ms
• 1 to 0 • Typ. 15 ms • Typ. 1.5 ms
Digital outputs
Number 4 8
In groups of 1 1
Incandescent lamp load (25000 1000 W 1000 W
LOGO!
312 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data
A.8 Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... LOGO! DM8 12/24R

Fluorescent tubes with ballast 10 x 58 W 10 x 58 W
Fluorescent tubes, convention- 1 x 58 W 1 x 58 W
ally compensated (25000
switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, uncompen- 10 x 58 W 10 x 58 W
increase
Protection of output relay (if Max. 16 A, Max. 16 A,
desired) characteristic B16 characteristic B16
Switching rate
LOGO! 12/24RCEo LOGO! DM8 12/24R

LOGO! 12/24RCE
Power supply
Input voltage 12/24 VDC 12/24 VDC
Permissible range 10.8 VDC to 28.8 VDC 10.8 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Reverse polarity protection Yes Yes
Power consumption
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 313
Technical data

LOGO! 12/24RCE
• 12 VDC • Typ. 2 ms • Typ. 2 ms
• 24 VDC • Typ. 5 ms • Typ. 5 ms
Power loss
• 12 VDC • 0.4 W to 1.7 W • 0.2 W to 1.0 W
• 24 VDC • 0.4 W to 2.2 W • 0.3 W to 1.0 W
Backup of the real-time clock at Typ. 20 days --
25 °C
Accuracy of the real-time clock Typ. ± 2 s/day --
Digital inputs
Number 8 4
Number of high speed inputs 4 (I3, I4, I5, I6) 0
Input frequency
• High speed input • Max. 5 kHz • --
Max. continuous permissible 28.8 VDC 28.8 VDC
voltage
Input voltage L+
• Signal 0 • < 5 VDC • < 5 VDC
• Signal 1 • > 8.5 VDC • > 8.5 VDC
Input current at
• Signal 0 < 0.88 mA (I3 to I6) < 0.88 mA
< 0.07 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)
> 1.5 mA (I3 to I6) > 1.5 mA
• Signal 1
> 0.12 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)
Delay time at
• 0 to 1 • Typ. 1.5 ms • Typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 to I6)
• 1 to 0 • Typ. 1.5 ms • Typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 to I6)
Analog inputs
Number 4 (I1=AI3, I2=AI4, I7=AI1, I8=AI2) - -
Range 0 VDC to 10 VDC --
Input impedance 72 kΩ
Cycle time for analog value 300 ms --
generation
Line length (shielded and twist- Max. 10 m --
ed)
Error limit ± 1.5% at FS --
LOGO!
314 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data

LOGO! 12/24RCE
Digital outputs
Number 4 4
In groups of 1 1
Continuous current Ith (per terminal) Recommended range of applica- Recommended range of appli-
tion ≥ 100 mA at 12 VAC/VDC cation ≥ 100 mA at
Max. 10 A per relay 12 VAC/VDC
Max. 5 A per relay
Incandescent lamp load (25000 1000 W 1000 W
Fluorescent tubes with ballast 10 x 58 W 10 x 58 W
Fluorescent tubes, conventional- 1 x 58 W 1 x 58 W
ly compensated (25000 switch-
ing cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, uncompen- 10 x 58 W 10 x 58 W
Derating None; across the entire tempera- None; across the entire tem-
ture range perature range
increase
Protection of output relay Max. 16 A, Max. 16 A,
(if desired) characteristic B16 characteristic B16
Switching rate
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 315
Technical data
A.9 Switching capacity/service life of the relay outputs
A.9 Switching capacity/service life of the relay outputs
Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with ohmic loading (heating):
Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with high inductive load to IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/AC
15 (contactors, solenoid coils, motors):
Note
To ensure the switching capacity and service life, keep the minimum switching load of the
relay outputs at 100 mA with the voltage of 12 VAC/VDC.
LOGO!
316 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data
A.10 Technical data: LOGO! AM2
A.10 Technical data: LOGO! AM2
LOGO! AM2
Power supply
Input voltage 12/24 VDC
Power consumption 15 mA to 30 mA
Power loss at
• 12 VDC • 0.2 W to 0.4 W
• 24 VDC • 0.4 W to 0.8 W
Ground terminal For connecting ground and shielding of the analog
measuring line
Analog inputs
Number 2
Type Unipolar
Input range 0 VDC to 10 VDC (input impedance 76 kΩ) or
0/4 mA to 20 mA (input impedance <250 Ω)
Resolution 10 bit, normalized to 0 to 1000
Cycle time for analog value generation 50 ms
Encoder supply voltage None
Error limit ± 1.5%
Interference frequency suppression 55 Hz
A.11 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 RTD
LOGO! AM2 RTD

Power supply
Input voltage 12/24 VDC
Power loss at
• 12 VDC • 0.2 W to 0.4 W
• 24 VDC • 0.4 W to 0.8 W
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 317
Technical data
A.12 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 AQ
LOGO! AM2 RTD

Ground terminal For connecting ground and shielding of the measuring
line.
Sensor inputs
Number 2
Type PT100 or PT1000 with the default temperature coeffi-
cient of α = 0.003850 for both Types, or compatible
sensors.
Connection of sensors
• 2-wire technique • Yes
• 3-wire technique • Yes
Measurement range -50 °C to +200 °C
-58 °F to +392 °F
Settings for the measurement display on
the LOGO! Basic:
• 1 °C steps • Offset: -50, Gain: 0.25
• 0.25 °C steps • Offset: -500, Gain: 2.50
(rounded to one decimal)
• 1 °F steps • Offset: -58, Gain: 0.45
• 0.25 °F steps • Offset: -580, Gain: 4.50
(rounded to one decimal)
Curve linearization No
Measuring current Ic Pulse current signal:
PT100: 0.5 mA
PT1000: 0.5 mA
Measurement rate Depends on the installation
Typ. 50 ms
Resolution 0.25 °C
Error limits (3-wire technique) Of the final measured value:
• 0 °C to +200 °C • ± 2 °C
• -50 °C to 200 °C • ± 2 °C
Cable length (twisted) Max. 10 m
Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz, 60 Hz
A.12 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 AQ
LOGO! AM2 AQ
Power supply
Input voltage 24 VDC
LOGO!
318 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data
A.13 Technical data: LOGO! Power 12 V
LOGO! AM2 AQ
Power loss at 24 VDC 0.4 W to 2.0 W
Ground terminal For connecting ground and shielding of the analog
output line.
Analog outputs
Number 2
Voltage range 0 VDC to 10 VDC
Voltage load ≥5 kΩ
Current output 0/4 mA to 20 mA
Curreny load ≤250 Ω
Resolution 10 bit, normalized to 0 to 1000
Cycle time for analog output Depending on installation (50 ms)
Error limit Voltage output: ± 2.5% FS
Short circuit protection Voltage output: Yes
Overload protection Current output: Yes
Voltage output: Yes

LOGO! Power 12 V is a primary-switched power supply unit for LOGO! devices. Two current
ranges are available.
LOGO! Power LOGO! Power

12 V/1.9 A 12 V/4.5 A
Input data
Input voltage 100 VAC to 240 VAC
Permissible range 85 VAC to 264 VAC
Voltage failure buffering > 40 ms (at 187 VAC)
Input current 0.53 A to 0.3 A 1.13 A to 0.61 A
Make current (25°C) ≤15 A ≤ 30 A
Device protection Internal
Recommended circuit breaker ≥ 16 A characteristic B
(IEC 898) in mains line ≥ 10 A characteristic C
Output data
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 319
Technical data

12 V/1.9 A 12 V/4.5 A
Output voltage 12 VDC
Overall tolerance ±3%
Adjustment range 10.5 VDC to 16.1 VDC
Residual ripple < 200/300 mVpp
Output current 1.9 A 4.5 A
Overcurrent limiting Typ. 2.5 A Typ. 5.9 A
Efficiency Typ. 80% Typ. 85%
Parallel circuit for power in- Yes
crease
Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference suppression EN 50081-1, Class B to EN 55022
Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11
Safety
Electrical isolation, prima- Yes, SELV (to EN 60950 and EN 50178)
ry/secondary
Safety class II
Degree of protection IP20 (to EN 60529)
CE marking Yes
UL/cUL certification Yes; UL 508/UL 60950
FM approval Yes; Class I, Div. 2, T4
GL approval Yes
General details
Ambient temperature range -20 °C to +55 °C, natural convection
Storage and shipping tempera- -40 °C to +70 °C
ture
Connections at input One terminal (1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per L1 and N
Connections at output Two terminals (1x.2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per + and -
Installation On 35 mm DIN rail, snap-on
Dimensions (WxHxD) 54 x 80 x 55 mm 72 x 90 x 55 mm
Weight Approx. 0.2 kg Approx. 0.3 kg

LOGO! Power 24 V is a primary-switched power supply module for LOGO! devices. Two
current ranges are available.

24 V/1.3 A 24 V/2.5 A
Input data
Permissible range 85 VAC to 264 VAC
Voltage failure buffering 40 ms (at 187 VAC)
LOGO!
320 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data

24 V/1.3 A 24 V/2.5 A
Input current 0.70 A to 0.35 A 1.22 A to 0.66 A
Inrush current (25°C) < 15 A < 30 A
Device protection Internal
Recommended circuit breaker ≥ 16 A characteristic B
(IEC 898) in mains line ≥ 10 A characteristic C
Output data
Output voltage 24 VDC
Overall tolerance ± 3%
Adjustment range 22.2 VDC to 26.4 VDC
Residual ripple < 200/300 mVpp
Output current 1.3 A 2.5 A
Overcurrent limiting Typ. 2.0 A Typ. 3.4 A
Efficiency > 82% > 87%
Parallel circuit for power in- Yes
crease
Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference suppression EN 50081-1, Class B to EN 55022
Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2,
EN 61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11
Safety
Electrical isolation, prima- Yes, SELV (to EN 60950 and EN 50178)
ry/secondary
Safety class II
Degree of protection IP20 (to EN 60529)
CE marking Yes
UL/cUL certification Yes; UL 508/UL 60950
FM approval Yes; Class I, Div. 2, T4
GL approval Yes
General details
Ambient temperature range -20 °C to +55 °C, natural convection
Storage and shipping tempera- -40 °C to +70 °C
ture
Connections at input One terminal (1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per L1 and N
Connections at output Two terminals (1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per + and -
Installation On 35 mm DIN rail, snap-on
Dimensions (WxHxD) 54 x 80 x 55 mm 72 x 90 x 55 mm
Weight Approx. 0.2 kg Approx. 0.3 kg
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 321
Technical data
A.15 Technical data: LOGO! Contact 24/230
A.15 Technical data: LOGO! Contact 24/230

LOGO! Contact 24 and LOGO! Contact 230 are switching modules for direct switching of
ohmic loads up to 20 Amps and motors up to 4 kW (without noise emission, hum-free). Both
modules have a built-in protective circuit for damping surges.
LOGO! LOGO!
Contact 24 Contact 230
Operating voltage 24 VDC 230 VAC;
50/60 Hz
Power consumption
• 24 VDC • 170 mA • --
• 230 VAC • -- • 20 mA
Switching capacity
Utilization category AC-1: Switching of ohmic loads at 55°C
Operating current at 400 V 20 A
Output with three-phase loads at 400 V 13 kW
Utilization category AC-2, AC-3: Motor with slip ring induction/cage
armature
Operating current at 400 V 8.4 A
Output with three-phase loads at 400 V 4 kW
Short-circuit protection:
Assignment type 1 25 A
Assignment type 2 10 A
Connecting leads Fine-wire with wire end ferrules
Solid wire
2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm2
2 x (1 to 2.5) mm2
1 x 4 mm2
Dimensions (WxHxD) 36 x 72 x 55 mm
Ambient temperature -25 °C to +55 °C
Storage temperature -50 °C to +80 °C
A.16 Technical data: LOGO! TDE (Text Display with Ethernet interfaces)
LOGO! TDE
Mechanical data
Keyboard Membrane keypad with 10 keys
Display FSTN-Graphic Display with 160 x 96 (columns x rows), LED
backlight (white/amber/red)
Power supply
Input voltage 24 VAC/VDC
12 VDC
LOGO!
322 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data
A.17 Technical data: LOGO! CSM12/24
LOGO! TDE
10.2 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Permissible mains frequency 47Hz to 63 Hz
Power consumption (Ethernet and
white backlight active)
• 12 VDC • Typ. 145 mA
• 24 VDC • Typ. 70 mA
• 24 VAC • Typ. 75 mA
Degree of protection
IP20 for LOGO! TDE excluding front panel
IP65 for LOGO! TDE front panel
Communication port
Ethernet performance Two Ethernet interfaces with 10/100 M full/half duplex data
transmission rate
Connection distance Max. 30 m
LCD Display and Backlight
Backlight lifetime 1) 20,000 hours
Display lifetime 2) 50,000 hours
Mounting
Mounting hole dimensions (WxH) (119 + 0.5 mm) x (78.5 + 0.5 mm)
Mounting conditions Mount the LOGO! TDE vertically on a flat surface of an IP
65 or Type 4x/12 enclosure.
1) The backlight lifetime is when the final brightness is 50% of the original brightness.
2) The display lifetime is calculated under ordinary operating and storage conditions: room tempera-
ture (20 ± 8 °C), normal humidity below 65% relative humidity, and not in exposure to direct sun-
light.

The CSM12/24 is a communications switch module with Ethernet. It can support the current
range of 12 VDC to 24 VDC.
LOGO! CSM12/24
Ethernet interface
Communications connector 4 x RJ45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 10/100 Mbps (half/full du-
plex), autopolarity, autonegotiation
Network cable Use a shielded Ethernet cable to connect to the Ethernet interface.
To minimize electromagnetic interference, make sure you use a
standard Category 5 shielded twisted-pair Ethernet cable with a
shielded RJ45 connector on each end.
Largest data packet 1518 byte
Smallest data packet 64 byte
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 323
Technical data
LOGO! CSM12/24
Delay resulting from latency When a frame passed through the CSM12/24, the stored and for-
ward function of the switch delays the frame according to the char-
acteristics below:
• With a 64 byte frame length by approx. 8 μs (at 100 Mbps).
• With a 1518 byte frame length by approx. 125 μs (at 100
Mbps).
Topology Star and bus topology
Note that the direct connection of two ports on the switch or acci-
dental connection over several switches causes an illegal loop.
Such a loop can lead to network overload and network failures.
Insulation of the ports You need shield all ports with each other that adhere to 1.5 kV
insulation voltage.
Learnable MAC addresses 1024
Aging time 300 seconds
Electrical specification
Input voltage 12 VDC to 24 VDC
(permitted range) (10.2 VDC to 30.2 VDC)
Current consumption 12 VDC: 0.2 A
24 VDC: 0.1 A
Effective power loss 1.5 W
Connection Per terminal for L+ and M
Cable cross section: 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.57 Nm (5 lb in)
Use 75 °C conductors only. Use copper conductors only.
Functional grounding You can achieve functional grounding by connecting a cable from
terminal 3, for example to the DIN rail.
Keep this cable as short as possible.
Grounding is, however, not necessary for interference-free opera-
tion.
Further technical specifications
Operating temperature 0 °C to 55 °C
Transport/storage temperature -40 °C to +70 °C
Relative humidity during opera- < 90% (no condensation)
tion
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 72 x 90 x 55
Net weight 140 g
Installation 35 mm DIN rail (DIN EN 60715 TH35) or wall mounting
Degree of protection IP20
Protection class III
LOGO!
324 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Technical data
A.18 Technical data: LOGO! CSM230

The CSM230 is a communications switch module with Ethernet. It can support the current
range of 100 VAC to 240 VAC and 115 VDC to 210 VDC.
LOGO! CSM230
Ethernet interface
Communications connector 4 x RJ45 jacks with MDI-X assignment 10/100 Mbps (half/full du-
plex), autopolarity, autonegotiation
Network cable Use a shielded Ethernet cable to connect to the Ethernet interface.
To minimize electromagnetic interference, make sure you use a
standard Category 5 shielded twisted-pair Ethernet cable with a
shielded RJ45 connector on each end.
Largest data packet 1518 bytes
Smallest data packet 64 bytes
Delay resulting from latency When a frame passed through the CSM12/24, the stored and for-
ward function of the switch delays the frame according to the char-
acteristics below:
• with a 64 bytes frame length by approx. 8 μs (at 100 Mbps).
• with a 1518 bytes frame length by approx. 125 μs (at 100
Mbps).
Topology Star and bus topology
Note that the direct connection of two ports on the switch or acci-
dental connection over several switches causes an illegal loop.
Such a loop can lead to network overload and network failures.
Insulation of the ports You need shield all ports with each other that adhere to 1.5 kV
insulation voltage.
Learnable MAC addresses 1024
Aging time 300 seconds
Electrical specification
115 VDC to 210 VDC
Permitted line power frequency AC 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Current consumption 100 VAC to 240 VAC: 0.05 A to 0.03 A
115 VDC to 210 VDC: 0.02 A to 0.012 A
Effective power loss 1.8 W
Connection Per terminal for L+ and M
Cable cross section: 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.57 Nm (5 lb in)
Use 75 °C conductors only. Use copper conductors only.
Functional grounding You can achieve functional grounding by connecting a cable from
terminal 3, for example to the DIN rail.
Keep this cable as short as possible.
Grounding is, however, not necessary for interference-free opera-
tion.
Further technical specifications
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 325
Technical data
LOGO! CSM230
Operating temperature 0 °C to 55 °C
Transport/storage temperature -40 °C to +70 °C
Relative humidity during opera- < 90% (no condensation)
tion
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 72 x 90 x 55
Net weight 155 g
Installation 35 mm DIN rail (DIN EN 60715 TH35) or wall mounting
Degree of protection IP20
LOGO!
326 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Determining the cycle time B
The program cycle is the complete execution of the circuit program, that is, primarily the
reading in of the inputs, the processing of the circuit program and the subsequent writing the
outputs. The cycle time is the time required to execute a circuit program once in full.
You can determine the time required for a program cycle using a short test program. Create
this test program in LOGO! to return a value from which you can calculate the cycle time.
Test program
To program this test program, follow these steps:
1. Create the test program by linking an output to a threshold trigger and connecting the
trigger input with an inverted flag.
2. Configure the threshold trigger as shown below. LOGO! generates a pulse in each
program cycle due to the inverted flag. The trigger interval is 2 seconds.
3. Now start the circuit program and switch LOGO! to parameter assignment mode. In this
mode, view the trigger parameters.
4. The reciprocal value of fa is equivalent to the LOGO! execution time of the current circuit
program in its memory.
1/fa = cycle time in s
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 327
Determining the cycle time
Explanation
The inverted flag block changes its output signal at each program execution. Thus, one logic
level (high or low) width is exactly equivalent to the length of one cycle. Hence, a period lasts
two cycles.
The threshold trigger indicates the ratio of periods per two seconds, which results in the ratio
of cycles per second.
LOGO!
328 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! without display ("LOGO! Pure") C
Because some specific applications do not require operator control and interface elements
such as buttons or a display, Siemens provides the LOGO! 12/24RCEo, LOGO! 24RCEo,
LOGO! 24CEo and LOGO! 230RCEo versions without display.
Less is definitely more!

The versions without display offer you the following benefits:
● Even more cost-effective without the operating elements
● Requires less switch cabinet space than conventional hardware
● Substantial benefits with regard to flexibility and prime costs compared to stand–alone
electronic switchgear
● Advantageous even for applications in which it replaces merely two or three conventional
switching devices
● Very easy to use
● Access-protected
● Compatible to LOGO! versions with display
● Offers the option to read data by means of LOGO!Soft Comfort
Creating a circuit program without operator panel

You can use one of two ways to create a circuit program for a LOGO! without display:
● You create the circuit program with LOGO!Soft Comfort on your PC and then download it
to LOGO!.
● You download the circuit program from a micro SD card (Page 277) to your LOGO!
without display.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 329
LOGO! without display ("LOGO! Pure")
Network communication indication

When you create a circuit program with LOGO!Soft Comfort, you need to connect the
module to your PC with an Ethernet cable. You can refer to the chapter Connecting the
Ethernet interface (Page 49) to find the details about the wiring of the Ethernet interface and
also about the status of the Ethernet LEDs.
Operating characteristics
LOGO! is ready for operation when you switch on power. Switching off a LOGO! without
display is equivalent to disconnecting the power supply.
You can not start or stop the circuit program of LOGO!...o versions by means of buttons,
therefore, this is why the LOGO!...o versions have other startup characteristics.
Startup characteristics
If there is no circuit program in LOGO! or on the inserted micro SD card, LOGO! remains in
STOP mode.
If there is a valid circuit program in LOGO! memory or on the micro SD card, LOGO!
automatically switches from STOP mode to RUN mode when you switch on power.
LOGO! automatically copies the circuit program on an inserted micro SD card to memory,
immediately after you switch on power. LOGO! rewrites the existing circuit program in
memory if one exists, and then changes from STOP mode to RUN mode.
By connecting an Ethernet cable to LOGO! (Page 293), you can use LOGO!Soft Comfort to
download the circuit program and place LOGO! in RUN mode.
Operating status indication

An LED on the front panel indicates the operating state:
● Lights red: Power On/STOP
● Lights green: Power On/RUN
The LED lights red after Power On and in all LOGO! states other than RUN mode. The LED
lights green when LOGO! is in RUN mode.
Reading current data

LOGO!Soft Comfort provides an online test for reading the current data of all functions while
the system is in RUN.
If your LOGO! without display holds a protected micro SD card, you cannot read the current
data unless you enter the correct password (Page 289) for the circuit program. LOGO!
deletes the circuit program from memory when you remove the micro SD card.
Deleting the circuit program

Use LOGO!Soft Comfort to delete the circuit program and password if a password exists.
LOGO!
330 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
LOGO! menu structure D
D.1 LOGO! Basic
D.1.1 Menu overview

All of the following menu commands are valid for LOGO! Basic with the ADMIN access level.
If you operate the LOGO! with the OP access level, some menu commands are invisible. For
more information see section Overview of LOGO! Menus (Page 68).
D.1.2 Main menu
① See "Start menu (Page 336)" ④ See "Network menu (Page 334)"
② See "Programming menu (Page 332)" ⑤ See "Diagnostic menu (Page 335)"
③ See "Setup menu (Page 333)" ⑥ See "Card menu (Page 332)"
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 331
LOGO! menu structure
D.1 LOGO! Basic
D.1.3 Programming menu
Note
When LOGO! is in RUN mode, only the menu commands with an asterisk (*) are available in
D.1.4 Card menu

This menu is available only when LOGO! is in programming mode.
LOGO!
332 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
D.1 LOGO! Basic
D.1.5 Setup menu
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 333
D.1 LOGO! Basic
Note
the setup menu.
D.1.6 Network menu
Note
the network menu.
LOGO!
334 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
D.1 LOGO! Basic
D.1.7 Diagnostics menu
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 335
D.1 LOGO! Basic
D.1.8 Start menu
LOGO!
336 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
D.2 LOGO! TDE
D.2 LOGO! TDE
D.2.1 Menu overview

All of the following menu commands are valid for the LOGO! TDE with the ADMIN access
level. If you operate the LOGO! TDE with the OP access level, some menu commands are
invisible. For more information, see section Overview of LOGO! menus (Page 68).
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 337
D.2 LOGO! TDE
D.2.2 Main menu
① See "LOGO! selection menu (Page 339)". ⑥ See "Diagnostic menu (Page 339)".
② See "Start menu (Page 339)". ⑦ See "Card menu (Page 339)".
③ See "Programming menu (Page 339)". ⑧ See "TDE setup menu (Page 341)".
④ See "Setup menu (Page 339)". ⑨ See "TDE network menu (Page 341)".
⑤ See "Network menu (Page 339)". ⑩ See "TDE diagnostic menu (Page 341)".
LOGO!
338 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
D.2 LOGO! TDE
D.2.3 LOGO! selection menu
D.2.4 LOGO! settings menu

The LOGO! TDE allows you to view and configure settings of the connected LOGO! Base
Module in its LOGO! settings menu.
Program menu
The program menu is the same as that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Programming
menu (Page 332)" for more information.
Card menu
The card menu is the same as that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Card menu
(Page 332)" for more information.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 339
D.2 LOGO! TDE
Setup menu
The setup menu is different from that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Setup menu
(Page 333)" for the complete setup menu for LOGO! Basic.
Note
When LOGO! 0BA8 is in RUN mode, only the menu commands with an asterisk (*) are
avaiable in the above menu.
LOGO!
340 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
D.2 LOGO! TDE
Network menu
The network menu is the same as that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Network menu
Diagnostics menu
The diagnostics menu is the same as that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Diagnostics
menu (Page 335)" for more information.
Start menu
The start menu is the same as that on the LOGO! Base Module. See "Start menu
Note
The start screen of the LOGO! TDE is always the clock display when LOGO! Basic is in RUN
mode.
D.2.5 LOGO! TDE settings menu

The LOGO! TDE allows you to view and configure settings of the LOGO! TDE itself.
The following LOGO! TDE settings menu structure applys both when the connected LOGO!
Basic is in RUN or STOP mode.
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 341
D.2 LOGO! TDE
LOGO! TDE setup menu
LOGO! TDE network menu

You can use the menu below to set the LOGO! TDE network configurations.
Note
The IP address of the LOGO! TDE is read-only when it is in RUN mode.
LOGO!
342 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
D.2 LOGO! TDE
LOGO! TDE diagnostics menu
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 343
D.2 LOGO! TDE
LOGO!
344 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Order numbers E
Modules
Variant Designation Order number

LOGO! Basic (Base Module LOGO! 12/24RCE * 6ED1052-1MD00-0BA8
with display) LOGO! 24CE * 6ED1052-1CC01-0BA8
LOGO! 24RCE (AC/DC) 6ED1052-1HB00-0BA8
LOGO! 230RCE (AC/DC) 6ED1052-1FB00-0BA8
LOGO! Pure (Base Module LOGO! 12/24RCEo * 6ED1052-2MD00-0BA8
without display) LOGO! 24CEo * 6ED1052-2CC01-0BA8
LOGO! 24RCEo (AC/DC) 6ED1052-2HB00-0BA8
LOGO! 230RCEo (AC/DC) 6ED1052-2FB00-0BA8
Digital modules LOGO! DM8 12/24R 6ED1055-1MB00-0BA2
LOGO! DM8 24 6ED1055-1CB00-0BA2
LOGO! DM8 24R 6ED1055-1HB00-0BA2
LOGO! DM8 230R 6ED1055-1FB00-0BA2
LOGO! DM16 24 6ED1055-1CB10-0BA2
LOGO! DM16 24R 6ED1055-1NB10-0BA2
LOGO! DM16 230R 6ED1055-1FB10-0BA2
Analog modules LOGO! AM2 6ED1055-1MA00-0BA2
LOGO! AM2 RTD 6ED1055-1MD00-0BA2
LOGO! AM2 AQ (0...10V, 0/4...20mA) 6ED1055-1MM00-0BA2
Text Display module with LOGO! TDE 6ED1055-4MH00-0BA1
Ethernet interfaces
*: Also with analog inputs
Accessories
Accessories Designation Order number

LOGO!Soft Comfort DVD LOGO!Soft Comfort V8.0 6ED1058-0BA08-0YA1
LOGO!Soft Comfort V8.0 Upgrade 6ED1058-0CA08-0YE1
Switching modules LOGO! Contact 24 V 6ED1057-4CA00-0AA0
LOGO! Contact 230 V 6ED1057-4EA00-0AA0
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 345
Order numbers
Accessories Designation Order number

Power modules LOGO! Power 12V/1.9A 6EP1321-1SH02
LOGO! Power 12V/4.5A 6EP1322-1SH02
LOGO! Power 24V/4A 6EP1332-1SH51
Ethernet switch modules LOGO! CSM12/24 6GK7177-1MA10-0AA0
LOGO! CSM230 6GK7177-1FA10-0AA0
LOGO!
346 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Abbreviations F
AM Analog module
B1 Block number B1
C LOGO! device designation: integrated clock
Cnt Count = Counter input
Dir Direction (of count, for example)
DM Digital Module
E LOGO! device designation: integrated Ethernet interface
En Enable = switching on (for example, clock generators)
Fre Input for frequency signals to be analyzed
GF Basic Functions
Inv Input for inverting the output signal
DL Data Log
NAI Network analog input
NAQ Network analog output
NI Network input
No Cam (parameter of the timer)
NQ Network output
o In LOGO! designations: without display
Par Parameter
R Reset input
R In LOGO! designations: Relay outputs
Ral Reset all = Input for resetting all internal values
S Set (latching relay, for example)
SF Special functions
T Time = parameter
TDE Text Display with Ethernet interfaces
Trg Trigger (parameter)
UDF User-Defined Function
0BA8 device The latest LOGO! Basic Module version, described in this manual
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 347
Abbreviations
LOGO!
348 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Index
B E
Backlight flags, 122 Error event diagnostics, 110
Basic functions Ethernet interface, 49
AND, 125 Expansion modules, 14
AND, with edge, 126
NAND, 127
NAND, with edge, 128 F
NOT, 130
Flag blocks, 121
OR, 128
Formatting micro SD cards, 277
XOR, 130
Basics on special functions, 131
Block number, 60
G
Blocks, 59
Gain, 134
GB-2312, 205
C
Certification and approvals
H
CE label, 23
cFMus, 23 Hysteresis, 196
C-tick label, 23
cULus, 23
KCC label, 24 I
Ch by Ch ticking, 209
Inputs
Character set flag, 122
analog inputs, 120
Character sets, 205
cursor keys, 123
Circuit protection, 39
digital inputs, 120
Co, 119
inverting, 124, 136
Compatiblity, 31
TDE function keys, 123
Connectors, 57
Installation and removal
Counters
DIN rail mounting, 33
operating hours, 181
LOGO! TDE, 36
threshold trigger, 185
wall-mounting, 35
Up/down, 178
Internet support, 5
Inverter, 130
ISO8859-1, 205
D
ISO8859-16, 205
Data log, 261 ISO8859-5, 205
Days of the week, 165 ISO8859-9, 205
Demo versions, 292
DIN rail, 32
Display modules, 14 L
Latching relay, 202, 202
LED, 330
Ln by Ln ticking, 209
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 349
Index
Logical inputs, 131 Program name

LOGO! 0BA8 network setup, 28 change, 77
LOGO! security character set, 76
menu access protection, 65 Program password
network access security, 287 assign, 77
program copy protection, 289 change, 79
program password protection, 77 deactivate, 80
LOGO! software, 291 Programming mode, 69
LOGO! structure, 16 Pulse relay, 203
LOGO! TDE, 20
backlight lifetime, 323
display lifetime, 323 R
function keys, 14
Relay outputs, 316
LCD lifetime, 323
Retentivity, 133
menus, 14
power-up screen, 14
LOGO! versions, 21
S
Sensor connections, 44
M Setting default values
AI number, 275
Master/slave mode, 108
clock, 270
Maximum switched current, 48
contrast and backlight, 271
Memory space, 115
menu language, 274
Message ticking, 208
start screen, 275
Setup with different voltage classes, 30
SF, 131, 136
N
Shift register bits, 123
Network I/O, 123 Shift-JIS, 205
Signal status transitions, 42
Special functions, 136
O Analog amplifier, 200
Analog comparator, 193
On-/Off-times, 166
Analog differential trigger, 191
On-delay, 141
Analog filter, 237
Open connectors, 123
Analog multiplexer, 218
Operating states
Analog ramp, 221
LOGO! Base Modules, 52
Analog threshold trigger, 188
LOGO! expansion modules, 53
Analog watchdog, 197
Outputs
Astronomical clock, 173
analog outputs, 121
Asynchronous pulse generator, 155
digital outputs, 121
Average value, 243
Overflow error, 235
Basics, 131
Edge-triggered wiping relay, 153
Hours counter, 181
P
Latching relay, 202
Parameter assignment mode, 263 Mathematic instruction, 232
Parameter inputs, 132 Mathematic instruction error detection, 235
Parameter protection, 133 Max/Min, 239
PC-LOGO mode, 293 Message texts, 204
Program cycle, 327 Mutliple function switch, 161
Off-delay, 145
LOGO!
350 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB
Index
On-/off- delay, 147 V

On-delay, 141
Voltage levels, 123
PI controller, 225
Pulse relay, 203
Pulse Width Modulator (PWM), 229
W
Random generator, 157
Relays, 202, 203 Web server, 245
Retentive on-delay, 149 logon, 248
Shift register, 216 logout, 255
Softkey, 214 Weekly timer
Stairway lighting switch, 159 examples, 166
Stopwatch, 176 setting, 166
Threshold trigger, 185 Wire ferrules, 37
Up-down counter, 178
Weekly timer, 164
Wiping relay, 151 Z
Yearly timer, 167
Zero division error, 235
Startup flag, 122
Zero offset, 134
Summertime/wintertime conversion, 98
Supported operating systems, 292
Switch to RUN mode, 81
Synchronization, 101
T
Time response, 132
Timebase, 132, 142
Timer accuracy, 133
Timers
Astronomical clock, 173
Asynchronous pulse generator, 155
Edge-triggered wiping relay, 153
Multiple function switch, 161
Off-delay, 145
On-/off- delay, 147
On-delay, 141
Random generator, 157
Retentive on-delay, 149
Stairway lighting switch, 159
Stopwatch, 176
Weekly timer, 164
Wiping relay (pulse output), 151
Yearly timer, 167
Timing inaccuracy, 133
U
User-Defined Function (UDF), 257
LOGO!
Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB 351
Index
LOGO!
352 Manual, 03/2015, A5E33039675 - AB

Manual en US

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Manual en US

Cargado por

Información del documento

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Manual en US

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

LOGO!

Siemens AG A5E33039675 - AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

Purpose of this manual

LOGO!'s place in information technology

The manual also includes appendices A - F, which follow the chapters.

Valid range of this manual

New features of the LOGO! 0BA8 device series

● Enhanced functions added to special function blocks

Compatibility with previous devices

3.7.10 Correcting programming errors .............................................................................................. 93

4.4.16 Hours counter .......................................................................................................................181

9.3 Copying data from LOGO! to the card ................................................................................. 283

D.1.2 Main menu ............................................................................................................................331

What LOGO! can do for you

Which devices are available?

Which expansion modules are available?

Which display modules are available?

Features of the LOGO! TDE

It's your choice

The LOGO! structure

① Power supply ② Inputs

① Power supply ② Inputs

① Power supply ② Inputs

① Power supply ② Inputs

LOGO! AM2 AQ (0 ... 10 VDC or 0/4 ... 20 mA)

① Power supply ② Outputs

How to identify LOGO!

The LOGO! TDE module is equipped with 2 Ethernet interfaces.

Symbol Designation Supply voltage Inputs Outputs Properties

Symbol Name Power supply Inputs Outputs

1) Different phases are not allowed within the inputs.

Text display module

Symbol Name Supply voltage Display

Certification and approvals

Recycling and Disposal

What you must note when installing

Safety of electronic control equipment

Carrying out tests

2.1 Modular LOGO! setup

2.1.1 Maximum LOGO! network setup

Maximum LOGO! 0BA8 network setup

A typical LOGO! 0BA8 network setup is shown below:

① Physical Ethernet connections

2.1.2 Maximum setup with expansion modules

Maximum setup of a LOGO! with analog inputs onboard - four in use

Maximum setup of a LOGO! with analog inputs onboard - two in use

High-speed/optimal communication performance

2.1.3 Setup with different voltage classes

Overview: Connecting an expansion module to the LOGO! Base Module

LOGO! Base Module Expansion modules

Overview: Connecting an additional expansion module to an expansion module

Expansion module Additional expansion modules

2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!

2.2.1 DIN rail mounting

Repeat the digital module steps to mount further expansion modules.

Drilling template for wall-mounting

Bore hole for M4 screw, tightening torque 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm

2.2.3 Mounting the LOGO! TDE

2. Place the included gasket on the frontplate of the LOGO! TDE.

2.2.4 Labeling LOGO!